all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | labels |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various |
|
7.User Manual | Users Manual | 1.44 MiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
7.User Manual Rev0513 | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 3.79 MiB | May 07 2018 / January 01 2019 | |||
various |
|
User Manual 20170829 v1 - Technical-User Manual | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB | ||||
various |
|
User Manual 20171025 v1 - (QCNFA425) UserMan | Users Manual | 1.48 MiB | April 12 2017 | |||
various |
|
14.Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.75 MiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
16.Module Lable | Internal Photos | 73.44 KiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
17.Module photo | Internal Photos | 204.99 KiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
15.External Photos | External Photos | 1.05 MiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
6.Label and Label Location | ID Label/Location Info | 337.24 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
6.Label and label location Rev0513 | ID Label/Location Info | 311.69 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
Label Location | ID Label/Location Info | 547.67 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
10.SAR ReportAppendix B. SAR Plots of SAR Measurement | RF Exposure Info | 191.42 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
10.SAR Report Appendix A. SAR Plots of System Verification | RF Exposure Info | 200.31 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-1 | RF Exposure Info | 4.60 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2 | RF Exposure Info | 4.91 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-3 | RF Exposure Info | 4.55 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-4 | RF Exposure Info | 4.85 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
10.SAR Report Appendix D. Photographs of the Test Set-Up | Test Setup Photos | 27.69 KiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
10.SAR Report Rev0728 | RF Exposure Info | 1.60 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
2.Cover Letter FCC Permissive Change Letter Rev0723 | Cover Letter(s) | 149.01 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
3.Declaration of authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 129.89 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various |
|
4.Request for non-disclosure | Cover Letter(s) | 101.97 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||
various | Cover Letter(s) | 18.54 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 | |||||
various |
|
11.Test Report BLE APLRSE only Rev0513 | Test Report | 817.29 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
11.Test Report WLAN APL RSE only Rev0513 | Test Report | 1.41 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
12.Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 403.57 KiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
13.SAR Report [FCC] Rev0527 | RF Exposure Info | 829.42 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix A. SAR Plots of System Verification | RF Exposure Info | 211.78 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix B. SAR Plots of SAR Measurement | RF Exposure Info | 200.41 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-1-1 | RF Exposure Info | 4.77 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-1-2 | RF Exposure Info | 4.76 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2-1 | RF Exposure Info | 4.65 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2-2 | RF Exposure Info | 5.00 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2-3 | RF Exposure Info | 552.89 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
13.SAR Report Appendix D. Photographs of the Test Set-Up | Test Setup Photos | 23.79 KiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release | ||
various | 16.Antenna SPEC-SLEingB219790280 374 | Operational Description | May 27 2021 | confidential | ||||
various | 16.Antenna SPEC-SLEingB219790388 491-Revised | Operational Description | May 27 2021 | confidential | ||||
various |
|
2.Cover Letter ermissive Change Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 148.68 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various | 9.QCNFA425 Tuning Power | Parts List/Tune Up Info | May 27 2021 | confidential | ||||
various |
|
11.Test Report RLAN APLRSEPower[FCC] Rev0527 | Test Report | 2.16 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various |
|
11.Test Report BT APLRSE only Rev0513 | Test Report | 923.67 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 | |||
various | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | External Photos | May 07 2018 / January 01 2019 | ||||||
various | Internal Photos | May 07 2018 / January 01 2019 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | May 07 2018 / January 01 2019 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | May 07 2018 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | External Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | Attestation Statements | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | External Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | External Photos | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Internal Photos | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Test Report | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | April 12 2017 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | External Photos | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | Internal Photos | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | July 07 2016 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | July 07 2016 |
various | 7.User Manual | Users Manual | 1.44 MiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release |
User's Manual
SATELLITE PRO E10-S
dynabook E10-S
Table of Contents
Legal, Regulatory, and Safety
Copyright, Disclaimer and Trademarks .............................................. 1-1
Chapter 1
Regulatory Information ......................................................................... 1-2
Video Standard Notice ........................................................................ 1-10
OpenSSL Toolkit License Issues ....................................................... 1-10
FreeType License Issues .................................................................... 1-13
ENERGY STAR® Program .................................................................. 1-16
Disposing of the computer and the computer's battery .................. 1-16
General Precautions ........................................................................... 1-17
Safety Icons ......................................................................................... 1-19
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Equipment checklist ............................................................................. 2-1
Conventions ........................................................................................... 2-1
Using your computer for the first time ................................................ 2-2
Getting to know Windows ..................................................................... 2-6
Turning off the power ............................................................................ 2-8
System Recovery ................................................................................ 2-12
Chapter 3
The Grand Tour
Front with the display closed ............................................................... 3-1
Left side .................................................................................................. 3-1
Right side ............................................................................................... 3-3
Underside ............................................................................................... 3-4
Front with the display open .................................................................. 3-5
Internal Hardware Components ........................................................... 3-7
Power Condition Descriptions ............................................................. 3-8
Chapter 4
Operating Basics
Using the Touch Pad ............................................................................. 4-1
The Keyboard ......................................................................................... 4-2
Using the Fingerprint Sensor ............................................................... 4-4
Battery .................................................................................................... 4-6
Memory media ..................................................................................... 4-10
HDMI™ out port ................................................................................... 4-13
LAN ....................................................................................................... 4-14
Wireless display .................................................................................. 4-16
Security lock ........................................................................................ 4-16
User's Manual
ii
Optional Accessories .......................................................................... 4-17
Sound System and Video mode ......................................................... 4-17
Chapter 5
Utilities and Advanced Usage
Utilities and Applications ...................................................................... 5-1
Special features ..................................................................................... 5-3
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Problem-solving process ..................................................................... 6-1
Hardware and system checklist ........................................................... 6-4
Technical support ................................................................................ 6-14
Chapter 7
Appendix
Specifications ........................................................................................ 7-1
AC Power Cord and Connectors .......................................................... 7-2
Information for Wireless Devices ........................................................ 7-3
Accessibility ........................................................................................ 7-16
Ease of Access for Dynabook notebook ........................................... 7-16
Legal Footnotes ................................................................................... 7-19
Glossary ............................................................................................... 7-21
Index
User's Manual
iii
Chapter 1
Legal, Regulatory, and Safety
This chapter states the legal, regulatory, and safety information applicable
to your computer.
Copyright, Disclaimer and Trademarks
Copyright
© 2021 Dynabook Inc. All Rights Reserved. Under the copyright laws, this
manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior written
permission of Dynabook Inc. No patent liability is assumed, with respect to
the use of the information contained herein.
First edition March 2021
Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and
other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author
or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for
personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated
above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied
material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the
copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject
to civil damages or criminal action. Comply with copyright laws in making
any reproduction from this manual.
Disclaimer
This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The
instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for your computer at
the time of this manual’s production. However, succeeding computers and
manuals are subject to change without notice. Dynabook Inc. assumes no
liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or
discrepancies between the computer and the manual.
Any references in this Guide to “Dynabook ” shall mean Dynabook Inc.
and/or its affiliates.
Trademarks
Intel, Intel logo are trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
User's Manual
1-1
The Bluetooth® word mark is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.
USB Type-C™ and USB-C™ are trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
All other company names, product names, and service names mentioned
herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.
Regulatory Information
The regulatory information herein might vary. Check the ID information on
the bottom of the device or box for specific information applicable to the
model you purchased.
FCC information
This device complies with FCC RF exposure requirements
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits can be attached to
this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals not
recommended by Dynabook is likely to result in interference to radio and
TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external devices
and the computer’s Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.2 Gen1) port, USB Type-
C™ port and HDMI™ out port. Changes or modifications made to this
equipment, not expressly approved by Dynabook or parties authorized by
Dynabook could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
User's Manual
1-2
FCC conditions
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1.
2.
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Contact
Address:
Dynabook Americas, Inc.
5241 California Avenue, Suite 100
Irvine, California, USA, 92617
Telephone:
(949) 583-3000
This information is only applicable for the countries/regions where it is
required.
California Prop 65 Warning
This product contains chemicals, including lead, known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
For the state of California only.
Export Administration Regulation
This document contains technical data that may be controlled under the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and may be subject to the
approval of the U.S. Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export,
directly or indirectly, in contravention of the U.S. Export Administration
Regulations is prohibited.
User's Manual
1-3
EU Declaration of Conformity
This product is carrying the CE-Mark in
accordance with the related European Directives.
Responsible for CE-Marking is Dynabook Europe
GmbH, Stresemannallee 4b, 41460 Neuss,
Germany. The complete and official EU
Declaration of Conformity can be found on the web
site http://emea.dynabook.com/product-conformity
on the Internet.
CE compliance
Hereby, Dynabook Europe GmbH declares that the model(s) described in
this manual is/are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following
internet address: http://emea.dynabook.com/product-conformity.
This product is labeled with the CE Mark in accordance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of the applicable European
Directives, notably Radio Equipment Directive (2014/53/EU), RoHS
Directive 2011/65/EU, Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC (ErP) and the
related implementing measures.
This product and the original options are designed to observe the
applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards. However,
Dynabook cannot guarantee that this product still observes these EMC
standards if options or cables not produced by Dynabook are connected or
implemented. In this case the persons who have connected/implemented
those options/cables have to provide assurance that the system (PC plus
options/cables) still fulfils the required standards. To avoid in general EMC
problems, the following guidance should be noted:
Only CE marked options should be connected/implemented
Only best shielded cables should be connected
Working environment
This product was designed to fulfil the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
requirements to be observed for so-called “Residential, commercial and
light industry environments”. Dynabook do not recommend the use of this
product in working environments other than the above listed working
environment.
For example, the following environments are not verified:
Industrial Environments (e.g. environments where a mains voltage of
380 V three-phase is used)
Medical Environments (according to Medical Device Directive)
Automotive Environments
Aircraft Environments
User's Manual
1-4
Any consequences resulting from the use of this product in working
environments that are not verified/recommended are not the responsibility
of Dynabook.
The consequences of the use of this product in non-verified working
environments may be:
Interference with other devices or machines in the near surrounding
area.
Malfunction of, or data loss from, this product caused by disturbances
generated by other devices or machines in the near surrounding area.
Therefore Dynabook strongly recommend that the electromagnetic
compatibility of this product should be suitably tested in all non-verified
working environments before use. In the case of vehicles or aircraft, the
manufacturer or airline operator respectively should be asked for
permission before use of this product.
Furthermore, for general safety reasons, the use of this product in
environments with explosive atmospheres is not permitted.
VCCI Class B Information (Japan Only)
Canadian regulatory information (Canada only)
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference
Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Note that Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) regulations
provide, that changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Dynabook could void your authority to operate this equipment.
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du
Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Canadian Notice
This device complies with ISED (formerly Industry Canada) license-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
User's Manual
1-5
この装置は、クラスB情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。VCCI-BLe présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
To comply with the Canadian RF exposure compliance requirements,
this device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. When operating this
computer, minimum distance of 13 mm from the antenna must be
maintained.
Pour être conforme aux exigences canadiennes en matière
d'exposition aux fréquences radio, l'appareil et son antenne ne doivent
pas être situés au même endroit qu'une autre antenne ou un autre
émetteur ni fonctionner en même temps. Une distance minimale de 13
mm de l'antenne doit être maintenue durant l'utilisation de cet
ordinateur.
This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15
GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be
used indoors for frequency range 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the
potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite
systems.
High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 GHz to
5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can
cause interference with and/or damage this device.
Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont
réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire
les risques de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites
mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux.
Veuillez noter que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont
désignés utilisateurs principaux (c.-à-d., qu’ils ont la priorité) pour les
bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars
pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs
LAN-EL.
The above caution applies to products that operate with an 802.11a radio
device.
La mise en garde ci-dessus ne s’applique qu’aux appareils ayant un
transmetteur opérant en mode 802.11 a.
User's Manual
1-6
Following information is only valid for EU-member
States:
Information requirements Regulation EC 1275/2008
Additional information as required by Regulation (EC)
1275/2008 amended by Regulation (EU) 801/2013
implementing European Eco-Design Directive with regard
to requirements for standby, off mode and networked
standby electric power consumption of electrical and
electronic household and office equipment can be found
here: http://emea.dynabook.com/environment.
Disposal of products
The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that
products must be collected and disposed of separately
from household waste. Integrated batteries and
accumulators can be disposed of with the product. They
will be separated at the recycling centres.
The black bar indicates that the product was placed on the
market after August 13, 2005.
By participating in the separate collection of products and
batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of
products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and human
health.
For more detailed information about the collection and
recycling programmes available in your country, please
visit our website http://emea.dynabook.com/environment
or contact your local council office or the retail outlet where
you purchased the product.
User's Manual
1-7
Disposal of batteries and/or accumulators
The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that
batteries and/or accumulators must be collected and
disposed of separately from household waste.
If the battery or accumulator contains more than the
specified values of lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and/or
cadmium (Cd) defined in the European Battery Directive,
then the chemical symbols for lead (Pb), mercury (Hg)
and/or cadmium (Cd) will appear below the crossed out
wheeled dust bin symbol.
By participating in the separate collection of batteries, you
will help to assure the proper disposal of products and
batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health. To
achieve this you should take any battery and/or
accumulator to your local recycling site, or to a retail outlet
or facility that offers to collect these devices for
environmentally friendly disposal, ensuring that the
terminal contacts are covered by non-conductive tape.
For more detailed information about the collection and
recycling programmes available in your country, please
visit our website http://emea.dynabook.com/environment
or contact your local council office or the retail outlet where
you purchased the product.
These symbols might not stick depending on the country and region where
you purchased.
REACH - Compliance Statement
The European Union (EU) chemical regulation, REACH (Registration,
Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals), entered into force
on 1 June 2007, with phased deadlines to 2018.
Dynabook will meet all REACH requirements and is committed to provide
our customers with information about the presence in our articles of
substances included on the candidate list according to REACH regulation.
Please consult the following website
http://emea.dynabook.com/environment for information about the presence
in our articles of substances included on the candidate list according to
REACH in a concentration above 0.1 % weight by weight.
User's Manual
1-8
Following information is only for Turkey:
Disposal of products:
The crossed wheelie bin symbol means that this
product should not be collected and disposed with
other household wastes. When product become waste
at the end-of-life, to protect environment and human
health, it should be given to nearest collection
recycling or disposal center. For more information
about collection and recycling programs in your
country please contact your local authority or the
retailer where the product was purchased.
Dynabook meets all requirements of Turkish regulation 28300
“Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical
and electronic equipment”.
AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Dynabook 28300 sayılı Türkiye ''Elektrikle çalışan ve elektronik
ekipmanda belirli tehlikeli maddelerin kullanımıyla ilgili kısıtlama”
yönetmeliği gereklerini tamamen yerine getirmektedir.
The number of possible pixel failures of your display is defined
according to ISO 9241-307 standards. If the number of pixel failures is
less than this standard, they will not be counted as defect or failure.
Battery is a consumption product, since the battery time depends on
the usage of your computer. If the battery can not be charged at all,
then it is a defect or failure. The changes in battery time is not a defect
or failure.
These symbols might not stick depending on the country and region where
you purchased.
Following information is only for India:
The use of this symbol indicates that this product may not
be treated as household waste.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
For more detailed information about recycling of this
product, please visit our website
https://asia.dynabook.com or contact call center
(1800-200-6768).
User's Manual
1-9
These symbols might not stick depending on the country and region where
you purchased.
Video Standard Notice
OpenSSL Toolkit License Issues
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC, THE VC-1 AND
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (I) ENCODING
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE STANDARDS ("VIDEO")
AND/OR (II) DECODING AVC, VC-1 AND MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE SUCH
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT
RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES
AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
http://www.mpegla.com.
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
OpenSSL License
------------------------
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org
/*=====================================================
Copyright (c) 1998-2019 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit."
[http://www.openssl.org]
User's Manual
1-10
4.
The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor
may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit"
[http://www.openssl.org]
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
=====================================================
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------------------
All rights reserved.
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are adheared to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder
is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
User's Manual
1-11
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)"
4.
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
*/
User's Manual
1-12
FreeType License Issues
The FreeType Project LICENSE
----------------------------
2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
============
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of
them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools
and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not
fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType
font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very
least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG
Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in
commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that:
We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution)
You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage)
You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only
parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your
documentation that you have used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or
without modifications, in commercial products.
We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no
liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to
use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the
following text:
Portions of this software are copyright (C) <year> The FreeType Project
"""
"""
www.freetype.org.
All rights reserved.
Legal Terms
Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you
actually use.
User's Manual
1-13
============
0. Definitions
--------------
Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the
authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the
`FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a
generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as
linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as
`a program using the FreeType engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project,
including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise
stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this
license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert
Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified
below.
1. No Warranty
--------------
2. Redistribution
--------------
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN
NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE
INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable
right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create
derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both
source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any
purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights
granted herein, subject to the following conditions:
Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT')
unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must
be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright
notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies
of source files.
User's Manual
1-14
Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that
the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to
the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't
mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the
FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.
3. Advertising
--------------
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name
of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without
specific prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising
materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or
`FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it.
However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license,
or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use,
distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the
FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the
terms of this license.
4. Contacts
--------------
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future
and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking
for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in
the documentation.
freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific
licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org
User's Manual
1-15
ENERGY STAR® Program
Your Computer model may be ENERGY STAR®
compliant. If the model you purchased is compliant, it uses
the ENERGY STAR logo and the following information
applies.
Dynabook is a partner in the ENERGY STAR Program and
has designed this computer to meet the latest ENERGY
STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Your computer
ships with the power management options preset to a
configuration that will provide the most stable operating
environment and optimum system performance for both
AC power and battery modes.
To conserve energy, your computer is set to enter the low-
power Sleep Mode which shuts down the system and
display within 15 minutes of inactivity in AC power mode.
Dynabook recommends that you leave this and other
energy saving features active, so that your computer will
operate at its maximum energy efficiency. You can wake
the computer from Sleep Mode by pressing the power
button.
Your ENERGY STAR certified computer should be set by
default to enter a low-power "sleep mode" after a period of
inactivity. Simply touching the mouse or keyboard "wakes"
the computer in seconds. These sleep features can save
you up to $23 per year (200 kWh per year in electricity)
and prevent up to 300 pounds of greenhouse gas
emissions annually. To learn how to adjust or activate
these sleep settings on your computer, please go to:
www.energystar.gov/sleepinstructions
To activate sleep settings organization-wide quickly and
easily through network tools, please go to:
www.energystar.gov/powermanagement
Disposing of the computer and the computer's
battery
The computer's battery pack is not user-accessible. Contact an authorized
service provider for details regarding how to dispose of the computer and
the battery pack.
Dynabook is strongly committed to reducing electronic waste. For the
efficient use of resources and appropriate treatment of hazardous
substances, local, state and federal regulations must be adhered to when
recycling your electronic device. To learn about Dynabook’s sustainability
commitment, visit:
User's Manual
1-16
http://us.dynabook.com/company/corporate-social-responsibility/sustainability
General Precautions
Your computer is designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and
withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be
observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the
computer.
Be certain to read the following general precautions and to note the
cautions included in the text of the manual.
Provide adequate ventilation
Always make sure that your computer and AC adaptor have adequate
ventilation and are protected from overheating when the power is turned on
or when an AC adaptor is connected to a power outlet (even if your
computer is in Sleep Mode). In this condition, observe the following:
Never cover your computer or AC adaptor with any object.
Never place your computer or AC adaptor near a heat source, such as
an electric blanket or heater.
Never cover or block the air vents including those at the base of the
computer.
Always operate your computer on a hard flat surface. Using your
computer on a carpet or other soft material can block the vents.
Always provide sufficient space around the computer.
Overheating your computer or AC adaptor could cause system failure,
computer or AC adaptor damage or a fire, possibly resulting in serious
injury.
Creating a computer-friendly environment
Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer
and any other items you are using, such as a printer.
Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide
adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they might overheat.
To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area
from:
Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight.
Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as
stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the
computer) or speakerphones.
Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature
change such as air conditioner vents or heaters.
Extreme heat, cold, or humidity.
Liquids and corrosive chemicals.
User's Manual
1-17
Stress injury
Heat injury
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains
information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists
that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. It also includes information
on work space design, posture, and lighting that can help reduce physical
stress.
Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is
used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the
temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical
contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the
computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your
skin might suffer a low-heat injury.
If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact
with the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can
become hot.
The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use, but this
condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the
AC adaptor, disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.
Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the
material could become damaged.
Pressure or impact damage
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of
strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise
cause it to malfunction.
Cleaning the computer
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust
and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it.
Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does
get wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry
completely. In these circumstances, you should get the computer
inspected by an authorized service provider in order to assess the
scope of any damage.
Clean the plastics of the computer using a cloth slightly dampened
with water.
You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass
cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with
the cloth.
Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any part
of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the computer.
User's Manual
1-18
Moving the computer
While the computer is designed for flexible day-to-day usage, you should
exercise a few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure
trouble-free operation.
Make sure all disk/disc activity has ended before moving the
computer.
Turn off (shut down) the computer.
Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the
computer.
Close the display panel.
Do not pick up the computer by its display panel.
Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC
adaptor and allow it to cool down. A failure to follow this instruction
might result in minor heat injury.
Do not expose the computer to rapid temperature changes (for
example, in a situation where you carry the computer from a cold
environment to a warm room). Do not turn on the power until
condensation disappears.
Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock. A failure to
follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer
failure, or loss of data.
Never transport your computer with any cards inserted. This might
damage either the computer and/or the card resulting in computer
failure.
Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer.
When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it
does not fall or hit anything.
Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements.
Mobile phones
Be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio
system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but
it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30 cm is maintained
between the computer and a mobile phone that is in use.
Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort
All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is
described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be
sure to read it before using the computer.
Safety Icons
Safety icons are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each type of message is identified as follows.
User's Manual
1-19
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or
serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.
A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or failure to follow
instructions might cause data loss, equipment damage, or might result in
minor or moderate injury.
Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of
your equipment.
User's Manual
1-20
Chapter 2
Getting Started
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and basic information to
start using your computer.
If you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by Dynabook,
some of the features described in this manual might not function properly.
You might not have all the software mentioned in this manual depending on
the model you purchased.
Equipment checklist
Carefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and
packaging materials for future use.
Hardware
Check to make sure that you have all the following items:
Portable Personal Computer
AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)
Documentation
User Information Guide or Quickstart
Warranty Information
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer
immediately.
Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight
terms and operating procedures.
Click
Right-click
Tap the Touch Pad or click the left Touch
Pad control button once.
Left-click the mouse once.
Click the right Touch Pad control button
once.
Right-click the mouse once.
User's Manual
2-1
Double-click
Start
Tap the Touch Pad or click the left Touch
Pad control button twice.
Left-click the mouse twice.
The word "Start" refers to the "
lower-left corner of the screen.
" button in the
Using your computer for the first time
Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for
information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is intended to
help you be more comfortable and productive while using a notebook
computer. By following the recommendations in it, you can reduce your
chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your hand, arms,
shoulders, or neck.
This section provides basic information to start using your computer. It
covers the following topics:
Connecting the AC adaptor
Opening the display
Turning on the power
Initial setup
Getting to know Windows
Use a virus-check program and make sure that it is updated regularly.
Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting
destroys all stored data.
It is a good idea to back up the internal Solid-State Drive or other main
storage device to external media periodically. General storage media
is not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain
conditions might result in data loss.
Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to
the internal Solid-State Drive or other storage media. Failure to do so
might result in data loss.
Connecting the AC adaptor
Attach the AC adaptor when you want to charge the battery or operate from
AC power. The battery pack must be charged before you can operate from
battery power.
The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100
volts to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 hertz or 60 hertz, enabling
you to use this computer in almost any country/region. The adaptor
converts AC power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this
computer.
User's Manual
2-2
Always use the AC adaptor that was included with your computer, or
use AC adaptors specified by Dynabook to avoid any risk of fire or
other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor
might cause fire or damage to the computer, possibly resulting in
serious injury. Dynabook assumes no liability for any damage caused
by use of an incompatible adaptor.
Never plug the AC adaptor into a power source that does not
correspond to both the voltage range and the frequency specified on
the regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so might result in a fire or
electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal
voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country
of use. Failure to do so might result in a fire or electric shock, possibly
resulting in serious injury.
The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in
the region the computer is bought and should not be used outside this
region. For use in other regions, buy power cords that conform to
safety rules and regulations in the particular region.
Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.
When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the
steps in the exact order as described in this User’s Manual. As a
general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.
Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface,
furniture, or any other surface that might be marred by exposure to
heat since the computer base and the surface of the AC adaptor
increase in temperature during normal use.
Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface
that is resistant to heat damage.
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for
detailed precautions and handling instructions.
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.
Figure 2-1 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)
User's Manual
2-3
Figure 2-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)
Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord is included with the computer
depending on the model.
2. Connect the DC output plug of the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack
on your computer.
Figure 2-3 Connecting the DC output plug to the computer
1. DC IN 19V jack
2. DC output plug
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet. The DC IN/Battery indicator
glows.
Opening the display
The display panel can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal
viewing.
To open the display panel, slowly lift it with one hand holding the center of
the display panel (as shown in the following figure) and the other hand
holding the palm rest down so that the main body of the computer is not
raised. This will allow the angle of the display panel to be adjusted to
provide optimum clarity.
User's Manual
2-4
21Figure 2-4 Opening the display panel
1. Display panel
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
Open and close the display panel with reasonable care. Opening it
vigorously or slamming it shut might damage the computer.
Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this might put stress
on the display panel’s hinges and cause damage.
Do not lift the computer by the display panel.
Do not close the computer with pens or any other objects left in
between the display panel and the keyboard.
When opening or closing the display panel, place one hand on the
palm rest to hold the computer in place and use the other hand to
slowly open or close the display panel (Do not use excessive force
when opening or closing the display panel).
Do not press or push with excessive force on the display screen,
otherwise the computer might become unsteady and possibly fall over.
Turning on the power
This section describes how to turn on the power. The Power indicator
indicates the status. Refer to the Power Condition Descriptions section for
more information.
After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you
have set up the operating system.
User's Manual
2-5
1Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup.
Do not touch the display screen while turning on the computer.
1. Open the display panel.
2. Press the power button.
Figure 2-5 Turning on the power
1. Power button
Initial setup
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
The Windows Startup Screen is the first screen displayed when you turn on
the power. To install the operating system properly, follow the on-screen
instructions on each screen.
When it is displayed, be sure to read the license terms and license
agreement carefully.
Getting to know Windows
For detailed information on what is new and how to operate Windows, refer
to Tips in the Start menu.
Start menu
The Start menu is the launching pad for everything you can do in the
Windows operating system, providing easy ways to access your apps,
programs, websites and other important information.
You can access the Start menu from an app or the desktop in the following
ways:
Click the Start button (
Press the Windows® logo key (
) on your keyboard.
) in the lower-left corner of the screen.
User's Manual
2-6
1You can pin your favorite apps to the Start menu as tiles in grid-like pattern,
and also group them. Tiles show you dynamic information from apps
without having to open them.
Windows taskbar
Task view
By default, the bottom of the desktop is Windows taskbar. You can see all
of your currently running apps on the Windows taskbar.
) is launched from the Windows taskbar at the bottom of the
Task view (
screen. Task view allows you to view the apps that are currently running.
Also, you can create custom desktops so that running apps can be
grouped for entertainment, productivity, or what you just want.
To do this, click the Task view icon
the apps you want to use on that desktop. To switch between desktops,
click Task view again.
, and then click New desktop. Open
Search
Search on the Windows taskbar allows you to find apps, files, settings, and
more on the computer. When Internet connection is available, it also shows
you the best search result from the Internet.
The personal assistant called Cortana may be available, depending on
your country/region. You can ask questions or talk to Cortana in your
natural voice, and Cortana answers your questions using information from
the Internet. To talk with Cortana, an internal or external microphone is
required.
Action Center
Settings
You can review important notifications from apps or Windows in Action
Center, and take action without having to open apps. It also provides quick
action buttons to access to most-used settings instantly. Select the Action
on the Windows taskbar to view your notifications and quick
Center icon
actions.
Settings provides system settings including advanced settings in the
Control Panel. They are divided in categories so that you can configure,
optimize, or personalize Windows.
You can also type in the keyword, and use Search to find any setting.
To open Settings, click Start ->
(Settings).
You can pin it to the Start menu as a tile by right-clicking on Settings and
selecting Pin to Start.
User's Manual
2-7
Windows Store
Windows Hello
Although many apps are pre-installed in your computer, you can also
download many others from the Windows Store.
You can search for and browse thousands of apps, all grouped into easy-
to-find categories there.
Windows Hello is a more personal and secure way to sign in to your
Windows system, apps, and services using fingerprint or a PIN.
To set up Windows Hello, click Start ->
in options.
(Settings) -> Accounts -> Sign-
Under Sign-in options, you will see options for Fingerprint if your computer
has fingerprint sensor that supports it. Once you have set up, you will be
able to sign in with a quick touch.
You might need to add a PIN under Windows Hello PIN before you can
set up Windows Hello Fingerprint.
Sign-in options
), Fingerprint (
), PIN
Windows offers a number of sign-in options including Password (
(
) authentication
to prevent from unauthorized access. If you have multiple sign-in methods
set for a user account, you can select an option on the Windows login
screen by clicking sign-in options.
) and Picture password (
), Face (
Turning off the power
The power can be turned off in one of the following modes, either Shut
Down Mode, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode.
Shut Down Mode
When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode, no data will be saved
and the computer will boot to the main screen of the operating system the
next time it is turned on.
1.
If you have entered data, either save it to the internal storage drive or
to other storage media.
2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the disk/
disc.
If you turn off the power while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you
might lose data or damage the disk.
Never turn off the power while an application is running. Failure to do
so can cause data loss.
User's Manual
2-8
Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device, or
remove storage media during data read/write. Failure to do so can
cause data loss.
3. Click Start ->
4.
(Power) and then select Shut down.
Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer.
Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately. Wait
a short period to avoid any potential damage.
Restarting the computer
Certain conditions require that you restart the computer, for example if you
change certain computer settings.
To restart the computer, there are several ways this can be achieved:
Click Start ->
(Power) and then select Restart.
Press CTRL, ALT, and DEL simultaneously (once) to display the
menu window, and then select Restart by clicking the power icon (
in the lower-right corner.
)
Before restarting the computer, be sure to save your data.
Sleep Mode
If you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without
exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this
mode, data is maintained in the main memory of the computer. When you
turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off.
When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places
where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always shut down the
computer. This includes turning off any wireless communication
functionalities, and canceling settings that reactivate the computer
automatically, such as a timer recording function. Failure to shut down the
computer in this way might allow the operating system to reactivate and run
pre-programmed tasks or preserve unsaved data, which might interfere
with aviation or other systems, possibly causing serious injury.
Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data.
To prevent data loss, do not switch to Sleep Mode while transferring
data to external media, such as USB devices, memory media, or other
external memory devices.
User's Manual
2-9
When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Sleep
Mode according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it,
click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> System and
Security -> Power Options.)
If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is
active, the application might not be restored when the computer is
next turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode.
To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode,
disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options.
Benefits of Sleep Mode
The Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:
Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than the
Hibernation Mode feature.
Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer
receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the
System Sleep Mode feature.
Allows the use of the panel power off feature.
Executing Sleep Mode
You can enter Sleep Mode in one of following ways:
(Power) and then select Sleep.
Click Start ->
Close the display panel. Note that this feature must be enabled within
the Power Options.
Press the power button. Note that this feature must be enabled within
the Power Options.
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left off
when you shut down the computer.
If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen
the overall operating time by turning it off into Hibernation Mode. Sleep
Mode consumes more power while the computer is off.
Sleep Mode limitations
Sleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:
Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the internal
storage drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is
turned on, the previous state is restored. Note that the Hibernation Mode
User's Manual
2-10
feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the
computer.
Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves
the contents of memory to the internal storage drive. However, for
safety sake, it is best to save your data manually.
Data will be lost if you disconnect the AC adaptor before saving is
completed.
To prevent data loss, do not switch to Hibernation Mode while
transferring data to external media, such as USB devices, memory
media, or other external memory devices.
Benefits of Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:
Saves data to the internal storage drive when the computer
automatically shuts down because of a low battery condition.
You can return to your previous working environment immediately
when you turn on the computer.
Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer
receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the
System Hibernate feature.
Allows the use of the panel power off feature.
Starting Hibernation Mode
To enter Hibernation Mode, click Start ->
Hibernate.
(Power) and then select
To show Hibernate in Power menu, set up according to the following
steps:
1. Click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> System and
Security -> Power Options.
2. Click Choose what the power buttons do or Choose what closing
the lid does.
3. Click Change settings that are currently unavailable.
4. Select the Hibernate check box from Shutdown settings.
5. Click the Save changes button.
Automatic Hibernation Mode
The computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically
when you press the power button or close the display panel. To define
these settings, do the following:
1. Click Power Options and then click Choose what the power
buttons do or Choose what closing the lid does.
User's Manual
2-11
2. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the
power button and When I close the lid.
3. Click the Save changes button.
Data saving in Hibernation Mode
When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer takes a
moment to save the current data in memory to the internal storage drive.
After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved
to the internal storage drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment
to let all capacitors fully discharge.
System Recovery
There is a hidden partition allocated on the internal storage drive for the
System Recovery Options in the event of a problem.
You can also create recovery media and restore the system.
The following items are described in this section:
Creating Recovery Media
Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery
Media
Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery Partition
(Provided with some models)
If you choose dynabook Maintenance Utility to erase the internal storage
drive, all data including the operating system and recovery partition will be
deleted. In that case, you cannot create recovery media or restore the pre-
installed software from the recovery partition. Make sure that you have
already created recovery media before you start dynabook Maintenance
Utility. This recovery media can be used to restore your system after you
have erased your internal storage drive.
Creating Recovery Media
This section describes how to create Recovery Media.
Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Media.
Be sure to close all other software programs.
Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy
load on the CPU.
Operate the computer at full power.
Do not use power-saving features.
User's Manual
2-12
Do not write to the media when the virus check software is running.
Wait for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any
software that checks files automatically in the background.
Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance internal
storage drive access speed. They might cause unstable operation and
damage data.
Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting
the media.
Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to
vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars.
Do not use on an unstable surface such as a stand.
A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the internal
storage drive, and can be copied to either disc media or USB Flash
Memory by using the following steps:
1. Select either blank disc or USB Flash Memory.
The application allows you to choose from a variety of different media
onto which the recovery image can be copied including disc media
and USB Flash Memory.
Some of the disc media might not be compatible with the optical disc
drive connected to your computer. You should therefore verify that the
optical disc drive supports the blank media you have chosen before
proceeding.
USB Flash Memory will be formatted and all the data in the USB Flash
Memory will be lost when proceeding.
2.
3.
Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows operating
system from the internal storage drive as normal.
Insert the first blank disc into the external optical disc drive tray, or
insert the USB Flash Memory into one available USB port.
4. Click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> System and
Security -> Security and Maintenance -> Recovery -> Create a
recovery drive.
Follow the on-screen instructions to finish creating the Recovery
Media.
5.
dynabook Recovery Wizard option in dynabook Maintenance Utility will
not exist if you restore the computer from the recovery media you created
by recovery drive creating option in Windows system.
User's Manual
2-13
Restoring the pre-installed software from your created
Recovery Media
If the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to use the Recovery
Media you have created to restore the computer to the state it was in when
you originally received it. To perform this restoration, do the following:
Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected during the restoring
process.
Do not close the display panel during the restoring process.
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the internal storage
drive will be reformatted and all data will be lost.
If your model has fingerprint function, before you reinstall the Windows
operating system, delete the registered fingerprints. Otherwise, the
same fingerprints cannot be registered after the reinstallation.
1.
Load the Recovery Media into the external optical disc drive or insert
the recovery USB Flash Memory into one available USB port.
2. Click Start ->
3. Hold down the F12 key and then release this key just after the
(Power) and then select Restart.
computer is powered on.
4. Use the up and down cursor key to select the appropriate option from
the menu according to your actual recovery media.
5. A menu is displayed from which you should follow the on-screen
instructions.
If you have previously chosen to remove the recovery partition without
creating Recovery Media, the Recovery Media cannot be created.
However, if you have already created a Recovery Media, you can use it to
restore the recovery partition.
If you have not created Recovery Media, contact Technical support for
assistance.
Restoring the pre-installed software from the
Recovery Partition (Provided with some models)
A portion of the total internal storage drive space is configured as a hidden
recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore
pre-installed software in the event of a problem.
If you set up your internal storage drive again later, do not change, delete,
or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual, otherwise
you might find that space for the required software is not available.
User's Manual
2-14
In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the
partitions on your internal storage drive, you might find that it becomes
impossible to set up your computer.
Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected during the restoring
process.
Do not close the display panel during the restoring process.
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the internal storage
drive will be reformatted and all data will be lost.
If your model has fingerprint function, before you reinstall the Windows
operating system, delete the registered fingerprints. Otherwise, the
same fingerprints cannot be registered after the reinstallation.
1. Click Start ->
2. Hold down 0 (zero) key and then release this key just after the
(Power) and then select Restart.
computer is powered on.
3. Select Troubleshoot -> dynabook Maintenance Utility ->
dynabook Recovery Wizard.
Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the recovery.
4.
User's Manual
2-15
Chapter 3
The Grand Tour
This chapter identifies the various components of the computer. It is
recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the
computer.
Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)
For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, refer to the Legal
Footnotes section.
Handle your computer carefully to avoid scratching or damaging the
surface.
Front with the display closed
The following figure shows the front of the computer with the display panel
in the closed position.
Figure 3-1 Front of the computer with display panel closed
Left side
The following figure shows the left side of the computer.
Figure 3-2 The left side of the computer
1. Security lock slot
2. DC IN 19V jack
3. DC IN/Battery indicator
4. HDMI™ out port
5. Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.2 Gen1)
port
6. USB Type-C™ (USB 3.2 Gen1) port
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
User's Manual
3-1
213456Security lock slot
A security cable can be attached to this slot and
then connected to a desk or other large object in
order to deter theft of the computer.
DC IN/Battery
indicator
DC IN 19V jack
The DC IN/Battery indicator shows the
condition of the DC IN and the battery charge
status. White indicates that the battery is fully
charged while the power is being correctly
supplied from the AC power adaptor.
Refer to the Power Condition Descriptions
section for more information on this feature.
The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to
power the computer and charge its internal
batteries. Note that you must use the AC adaptor
that was included with your computer, or use AC
adaptors specified by Dynabook. Use of an
incompatible AC adaptor might cause fire or
damage to the computer, possibly resulting in
serious injury.
HDMI™ out port
HDMI™ out port can connect with Type A
connector HDMI™ cable.
Universal Serial Bus
(USB 3.2 Gen1) port
USB Type-C™ (USB
3.2 Gen1) port
One type-A Universal Serial Bus port, which
complies to the USB 3.2 standard, is provided on
the left side of the computer.
USB 3.2 port is compliant with USB 3.2 standard
and backward compatible with USB 2.0 devices.
One USB Type-C™ port, which complies to the
USB 3.2 Gen1 standard, is provided on the left
side of the computer.
This USB Type-C™ port supports USB 3.2 Gen1
(DC5V, 2A) with theoretical maximum
transmission rate at 5Gbps. This port supports
USB data transmission, Video output (audio
stream can be included) and USB Power
Delivery.
Note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of
all USB devices that are available. Some functions associated with a
specific device might not operate properly.
User's Manual
3-2
Before removing a USB device from the USB port or USB Type-C™
port of your computer, click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject
Media icon on the Windows Taskbar, and then select the USB device
that you want to remove.
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples, and paper clips, out of
the USB port or the USB Type-C™ port. Foreign metal objects can create a
short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious
injury.
Right side
The following figure shows the right side of the computer.
Figure 3-3 The right side of the computer
1. Power indicator
2. Power button
3. Memory media slot
4. Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.2 Gen1)
port
5. Headphone/Microphone jack
6. LAN jack
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
Power indicator
The Power indicator normally glows white when
the computer is turned on.
Power button
Press this button to turn the computer's power on
or off.
Memory media slot
This slot lets you insert a micro SD™/SDHC™/
SDXC™ memory card. Refer to the Memory
media section for more information.
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples, and paper clips, out of
the Memory media slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Headphone/
Microphone jack
A 3.5 mm mini headphone/microphone jack
enables connection of a monaural microphone,
stereo headphones, or a headset.
User's Manual
3-3
213456Universal Serial Bus
(USB 3.2 Gen1) port
One type-A Universal Serial Bus port, which
complies to the USB 3.2 standard, is provided on
the right side of the computer.
USB 3.2 port is compliant with USB 3.2 standard
and backward compatible with USB 2.0 devices.
Note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of
all USB devices that are available. Some functions associated with a
specific device might not operate properly.
Before removing a USB device from the USB port of your computer,
click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon on the
Windows Taskbar, and then select the USB device that you want to
remove.
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples, and paper clips, out of
the USB port. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can
cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
LAN jack
This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor
has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10
megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet
LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) or
Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per
second, 1000BASE-T). Refer to Operating
Basics, for details.
Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It might
cause damage or malfunction.
Underside
The following figure shows the underside of the computer. Ensure that the
display is closed before the computer is turned over to avoid causing any
damage.
User's Manual
3-4
Figure 3-4 The underside of the computer
1. Stereo speakers
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
Stereo speakers
The speakers emit sound generated by your
software as well as audio alarms, such as low
battery condition, generated by the system.
Front with the display open
This section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to
open the display, lift up the display panel and position it at a comfortable
viewing angle for you.
Figure 3-5 The front of the computer with the display panel open
1. Web Camera
2. Web Camera LED
3. Microphones
4. Display screen
5. CAPS LOCK indicator
6. Display hinge
7. Keyboard
8. Fingerprint Sensor*
9. Touch Pad
10. Touch Pad control buttons
11. Wireless communication antennas
(not shown)
* Provided with some models.
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
User's Manual
3-5
11124671053891111Web Camera
Web Camera is a device that allows you to
record video or take photographs with your
computer. You can use it for video chatting or
video conferences using a communication tool.
Web Camera LED
The Web Camera LED glows when the Web
Camera is operating.
Do not point the web camera directly at the sun.
Do not touch or press strongly on the web camera lens and LED.
Failure to do so might reduce image quality, possibly resulting in
recognizing faces incorrectly. Use an eyeglass cleaner (cleaner cloth)
or other soft cloth to clean the lens and the LED if it becomes dirty.
While web camera is capturing your face, make sure that your face is
in front of the web camera and you look directly at it.
Microphones
Display screen
The built-in microphones allow you to record
sounds for your application. Refer to the Sound
System and Video mode section for more
information.
29.5 cm (11.6") LCD screen, is configured with
following resolution:
HD, 1366 horizontal x 768 vertical pixels
Be aware that, when the computer is operating
on the AC adaptor, the image displayed on the
internal screen is somewhat brighter than when it
operates on battery power. This difference in
brightness levels is intended to save power when
operating on battery.
Legal Footnote (LCD)
For more information regarding LCD, refer to the Legal Footnotes section.
CAPS LOCK indicator This indicator glows white when letter keys are
locked into their uppercase format.
Display hinge
Keyboard
The display hinge allows the display panel to be
positioned at a variety of easy-to-view angles.
The keyboard contains character keys, control
keys, function keys, and special Windows keys,
providing all the functionality of a full-size
keyboard.
Refer to the The Keyboard section for details.
User's Manual
3-6
Fingerprint Sensor
Touch Pad
Touch Pad control
buttons
This sensor enables you to enroll and sign in with
a fingerprint in Windows Hello. For more
information, refer to the on-screen instructions in
Windows Hello.
Some models are equipped with a Fingerprint
Sensor.
The Touch Pad located in the palm rest is used
to control the movement of the mouse pointer.
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move
your fingertip across it in the direction you want
the mouse pointer to go.
The two buttons located on the bottom of the
Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a
standard mouse. Press the left button to select a
menu item or to manipulate text or graphics
designated by the mouse pointer, and press the
right button to display a menu or other function
depending on the software you are using.
Wireless
communication
antennas
The following antennas are built-in:
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
Do not cover the wireless communication antennas area with any metal
objects, otherwise the wireless function might not work.
Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)
For more information regarding Wireless LAN, refer to the Legal Footnotes
section.
Internal Hardware Components
This section describes the internal hardware components of your computer.
The actual specifications might vary depending on the model you
purchased.
CPU
The processor type varies depending on model.
To check which type of processor is included in
your model, click Start -> dynabook Support
Utility -> System Information.
Legal Footnote (CPU)
For more information regarding CPU, refer to the Legal Footnotes section.
User's Manual
3-7
Internal Storage Drive The capacity of the internal storage drive varies
depending on the model.
Note that part of the internal storage drive overall
capacity is reserved as administration space.
Your computer is equipped with a "Solid-State Drive (SSD)". In this
manual, the word "internal storage drive" refers to SSD unless
otherwise stated.
SSD is a large-capacity storage device which uses Solid-State
Memory in place of a magnetic disk of the hard disk.
Under certain unusual conditions of prolonged non-use and/or exposure to
high temperatures, the SSD might be vulnerable to data retention errors.
Legal Footnote (Internal Storage Drive Capacity)
For more information regarding Internal Storage Drive Capacity, refer to the
Legal Footnotes section.
Video RAM
Graphics Processing
Unit
The memory in the graphics adaptor of the
computer, used to store the image displayed on a
bitmap display.
The amount of Video RAM available depends on
the system memory of the computer.
Graphics Processing Unit (GPU) performance
might vary depending on product model, design
configuration, applications, power management
settings and features utilized. GPU performance
is only optimized when operating in AC power
mode and might decrease considerably when
operating in battery power mode.
Legal Footnote (Graphics Processing Unit (GPU))
For more information regarding Graphics Processing Unit (GPU), refer to
the Legal Footnotes section.
RTC battery
The internal RTC battery backs up the Real-Time
Clock (RTC) and calendar.
Power Condition Descriptions
The computer operating capability and battery charge status are affected
by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is
connected and what the battery charge level is.
User's Manual
3-8
DC IN/Battery indicator
Check the DC IN/Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery
pack and the power status with the AC adaptor connected. The following
indicator conditions should be noted:
Flashing Amber
The battery charge might be low. Connect the AC
adaptor to recharge the battery.
If it still flashes amber, it indicates a problem with
the computer. Disconnect the AC adaptor for
several seconds, and then reconnect it. After
that, press the power button. If it still does not
operate properly, you should contact your
reseller or dealer.
Indicates that the AC adaptor is connected and
the battery is charging.
Indicates that the AC adaptor is connected and
the battery is fully charged.
Under any other conditions, the indicator does
not light.
Amber
White
No light
If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge
stops and the DC IN/Battery indicator goes out. When the temperature of
the battery pack falls to a normal range, charging will resume. This process
occurs regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off.
Power indicator
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer.
The following indicator conditions should be noted:
White
No light
Indicates that the computer is turned on.
Under any other conditions, the indicator does
not light.
User's Manual
3-9
Chapter 4
Operating Basics
This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer, and
highlights the precautions that must be taken when using it.
Using the Touch Pad
The Touch Pad on the palm rest might support the following gestures:
Tap
Tap once on the Touch Pad to activate an item,
such as an app.
Two-Finger Tap
Pinch or stretch
Two-Finger Scroll
Tap once on the Touch Pad with two fingers
together to display a menu or other function
depending on the software you are using.
(Similar to right-click)
Place two fingers down on the Touch Pad and
move them toward each other (pinch) or away
from each other (stretch). This shows different
levels of information or visually zooms in or out.
Place two fingers down and slide them vertically
or horizontally from anywhere on the Touch Pad.
This allows you to operate the scroll bars of a
window.
Three-Finger Tap
Tap once on the Touch Pad with three fingers
together to launch Windows Search.
User's Manual
4-1
Three-Finger Scroll
Place three fingers down and slide them
vertically or horizontally from anywhere on the
Touch Pad.
Slide towards left/right: switches between your
open apps. Slide your fingers slowly across the
Touch Pad to flip through them all.
Slide up: views all your open apps in task view.
Slide down: shows the desktop.
Four-Finger Tap
Tap once on the Touch Pad with four fingers
together to open the Action Center.
Four-Finger Scroll
Place four fingers down and slide them vertically
or horizontally from anywhere on the Touch Pad.
Slide towards left/right: switches between virtual
desktops.
Slide up: views all your open apps in task view.
Slide down: shows the desktop.
Do not put items on the Touch Pad surface to prevent abnormal action.
Some of the Touch Pad operations described in this section are only
supported in certain applications.
The Keyboard
The number of keys available on your keyboard depends on which country/
region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being available for
numerous languages.
There are different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys, function keys,
and Windows special keys.
Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Failure to do so might
damage the parts under the key caps.
Keyboard indicator
The following figure shows the position of the CAPS LOCK indicator.
When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard produces capitals
when any letter is typed.
User's Manual
4-2
Figure 4-1 CAPS LOCK indicator
1. CAPS LOCK indicator
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
CAPS LOCK
This indicator glows white when letter keys are
locked into their uppercase format.
Function Keys
The function keys (F1 ~ F12) are the 12 keys at the top of your keyboard.
You can configure the function keys’ mode as "Special function mode" or
"Standard F1-F12 mode" in the BIOS setup utility. "Special function mode"
allows you to use special functions without pressing the FN key.
Refer to BIOS setup utility to enter the BIOS setup utility.
Special
function mode
Standard F1-
F12 mode
Function
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
FN + F1
FN + F2
FN + F3
FN + F5
FN + F6
Allows you to search your computer,
the web, or within an app.
Decreases the brightness of the
display panel in individual steps.
Increases the brightness of the
display panel in individual steps.
To use a simultaneous mode, you
must set the resolution of the internal
display panel to match the resolution
of the external display device.
Enables or disables the Touch Pad.
Moves media backward.
FN + F4
Changes the active display device.
User's Manual
4-3
1Special
function mode
Standard F1-
F12 mode
Function
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
FN + F7
FN + F8
FN + F9
FN + F10
Plays or pauses media playback.
Moves media forward.
Decreases the playback volume of the
computer.
Increases the playback volume of the
computer.
FN + F11
Turns the sound on or off.
FN + F12
Turns the Airplane mode on or off.
FN + 1
FN + 1
FN + 2
FN + 2
Reduces the icon size on the desktop
or the font sizes within one of the
supported application windows.
Enlarges the icon size on the desktop
or the font sizes within one of the
supported application windows.
FN + Space
FN + Space
Changes the display resolution.
Some functions show the toast notification at the edges of the screen.
Windows special key
The keyboard provides the key that has special functions in Windows.
This Windows® logo key activates the Windows Start menu.
Using the Fingerprint Sensor
Some models are equipped with the fingerprint sensor for the purpose of
enrolling and recognizing fingerprints. Lightly touch and rest your finger on
the fingerprint sensor to recognize fingerprints. During enrollment, you
might need to touch and lift your finger on the sensor repeatedly until setup
is complete. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the setup.
By enrolling the ID and password onto the fingerprint authentication
feature, it is no longer necessary to input the password from the keyboard.
Fingerprint feature enables you to:
Sign-in to Windows
Unlock the password-protected screen-saver.
User's Manual
4-4
Figure 4-2 Using the Fingerprint Sensor
1. Fingerprint sensor
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint
function.
Total fingerprints which can be registered are 10 pcs per account.
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor
Be aware of the following considerations when using the fingerprint sensor.
A failure to follow these guidelines might result in damage to the sensor,
sensor failure, fingerprint recognition problems or a lower fingerprint
recognition success rate.
Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp
objects.
Do not press the sensor strongly.
Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects. Keep the
sensor surface dry and free from water vapor.
Do not touch the sensor with a soiled or dirty finger as minute foreign
particles of dust and dirt might scratch it.
Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.
Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any other object which might
have a build-up of static electricity on it.
Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether
for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.
Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.
Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal
surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures,
especially when the weather is dry.
Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth. Do not use detergent or any
other chemicals to clean the sensor.
User's Manual
4-5
11Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as
they might result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the
fingerprint recognition success rate:
Soaked or swollen finger, for example as might occur after taking
a bath
Injured finger
Wet finger
Soiled or oily finger
Extremely dry skin condition on finger
Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate:
Enroll two or more fingers.
Enroll additional fingers if a recognition failure often occurs when using
already enrolled fingers.
Check the condition of your finger. Any conditions which have
changed since enrollment, such as injury, rough skin, and extremely
dry, wet, soiled, dirty, oily, soaked or swollen fingers, might lower the
recognition success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the
finger becomes thinner or fatter, the recognition success rate might be
lowered.
As the fingerprint for each finger is different and unique, you should
ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints
are used for identification.
The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there might be instances
where certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to
insufficient unique characteristics in their fingerprints.
The recognition success rate might differ from user to user.
This section explains battery types, use, recharging methods and handling.
Battery
Battery pack
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the main power source of the
computer is a lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as the
main battery.
Real-Time Clock (RTC) battery
The Real-Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real-
time clock and calendar function and also maintains the system
configuration while the computer is turned off. If the RTC battery becomes
completely discharged, the system will lose this information and the real-
time clock and calendar will stop working.
You can change the Real-Time Clock settings in the BIOS setup utility.
Refer to Real-Time Clock for further information.
User's Manual
4-6
Care and use of the battery pack
This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle
your battery pack properly.
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for
detailed precautions and handling instructions.
Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature from 5 through 35
degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak, battery
pack performance might deteriorate, and the battery life might be
shortened.
Charging the battery
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the DC IN/Battery
indicator flashes amber to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power
remain. If you continue to use the computer while the DC IN/Battery
indicator flashes, the computer enters Hibernation Mode so that you do not
lose any data, and automatically turn itself off.
You must recharge the battery pack when it becomes discharged.
Procedures
To recharge a battery pack, connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack
and plug the other end into a working outlet. The DC IN/Battery indicator
glows amber while the battery is being charged.
Charging Time
The following table shows the approximate time required to charge an
exhausted battery fully.
Battery type
Power off
Power on
Battery pack
about 3.5 hours about 3 ~ 10 hours
(45 Wh, 2 cell)
RTC battery
Does not
charge
Does not charge
Be aware that the charging time when the computer is on is affected
by ambient temperature, the temperature of the computer and how
you are using the computer. If you make heavy use of external
devices for example, the battery might scarcely charge at all during
operation.
User's Manual
4-7
Note that charging time will vary depending on the ambient
temperature, the computer's internal temperature, and how the
computer is being used. For example, whether the display is set to
shut off automatically when idle, whether you make heavy use of
external devices powered by the computer, or if the computer's
internal storage drive is being accessed frequently by an application.
The battery might not be charged depending on how the computer is
being used, and the charge of battery decreases and battery might not
be fully charged sometimes.
Charging notice
The battery might not begin charging immediately under the following
conditions:
The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it
might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full
capacity, charge it at room temperature of between 5°C to 35°C (41°F
to 95°F).
The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance, leave the
AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery should begin
charging.
The DC IN/Battery indicator might show a rapid decrease in battery
operating time when you try to charge a battery under the following
conditions:
The battery has not been used for a long time.
The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer
for a long time.
In such cases, do the following:
1.
Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power
on until the system automatically turns itself off.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack on the computer and to
a wall outlet that is supplying power.
3. Charge the battery until the DC IN/Battery indicator glows white.
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal
capacity.
Monitoring battery capacity
Remaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods:
Clicking the battery icon on the Windows Taskbar
Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window
User's Manual
4-8
Wait several seconds to monitor the remaining operating time because
the computer needs time to check the remaining capacity of the
battery pack and then calculate the remaining operating time, based
on this together with the current power consumption.
Be aware that the actual remaining operating time might differ slightly
from the calculated time.
With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery capacity will
gradually decrease. In view of this, it is noted that an often used, older
battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when both
are fully charged.
Maximizing battery operating time
The usefulness of a battery depends on how long it can supply power on a
single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:
Processor speed
Screen brightness
Internal storage drive power off period
How often and for how long you use the internal storage drive and
external disk drives, for example, optical disc
How much charge the battery contained to begin with
How you use optional devices, such as a USB device, to which the
battery supplies power
Where you store your programs and data
Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the
keyboard - closing the display saves power
The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low
temperatures
System Sleep Mode
System Hibernation Mode
Display power off period
Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if
you are frequently turning the computer off and on
Battery pack exhausted time
When you turn off the power of your computer with the battery pack fully
charged, the battery pack will exhaust within the following approximate
period.
Battery type
Sleep Mode
Shut Down Mode
Battery pack
about 9 days
about 60 days
(45 Wh, 2 cell)
RTC battery
about 7 years
about 7 years
User's Manual
4-9
Be aware that the battery pack exhausted time is affected if there are any
external devices connected.
Extending battery life
To maximize the life of your battery pack, do the following at least once a
month:
Turn off the computer's power.
1.
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power. If it
does not turn on, then go to Step 4.
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find
that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time,
continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged. However,
if the DC IN/Battery indicator flashes or there is some other warning
to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4.
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack on the computer and to
a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN/Battery indicator
glows amber to indicate that the battery pack is being charged.
However, if DC IN/Battery indicator does not glow, this indicates that
power is not being supplied. Check the connections for the AC adaptor
and the power cord.
5. Charge the battery pack until the DC IN/Battery indicator glows white.
Memory media
The computer is equipped with a memory media slot that can
accommodate some kinds of memory media with various memory
capacities so that you can easily transfer data from devices, such as digital
cameras and Personal Digital Assistants.
Keep foreign objects out of the memory media slot. Never allow metal
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or
Keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can
cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
This Memory media slot supports the following memory media:
microSD/SDHC/SDXC Card.
Not all memory media have been tested and verified to work correctly.
Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all memory media can
operate properly.
Figure 4-3 Examples of memory media (microSD card)
User's Manual
4-10
Points to note about the memory media card
microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital
Music Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or
playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or play back
protected material on another computer or other device, and you cannot
reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment.
The supported maximum capacity of memory card is 512 GB.
Memory media format
New media cards are formatted according to specific standards. If you wish
to reformat a media card, be sure to do so with a device that uses media
cards.
Formatting a memory media card
Memory media cards are sold already formatted in conformity to specific
standards. If you reformat a memory card, be sure to reformat it with a
device such as digital camera or digital audio player that uses the memory
cards, not with the format command provided within Windows.
To format all areas of the memory card, including the protected area, you
must obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy protection
system.
Media care
Observe the following precautions when handling the card.
Do not twist or bend cards.
Do not expose cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media
close to containers of liquid.
Do not touch the metal part of a card or expose it to liquids or let it get
dirty.
After using card, return it to its case.
The card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not
try to force the card into the slot.
Do not leave a card partially inserted in the slot. Press the card until
you hear it click into place.
Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to
record data.
Memory cards have a limited lifespan, so it is important to back up
important data.
Do not write to a card if the battery power is low. Low power might
affect writing accuracy.
Do not remove a card while read/write is in progress.
User's Manual
4-11
For more details on using memory cards, see manuals accompanying the
cards.
Inserting memory media
The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To
insert memory media, do the following:
1.
2.
Turn the memory media so that the contacts (metal areas) face down.
Insert the memory media into the memory media slot on your
computer.
3. Press the memory media gently until it clicks into place.
Figure 4-4 Inserting memory media
1. Memory media slot
2. Memory media
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
Make sure that the memory media is oriented properly before you
insert it. If you insert the media in wrong direction, you might not be
able to remove it.
When inserting the memory media, do not touch the metal contacts.
You might expose the storage area to static electricity, which can
destroy data.
Do not turn off the computer or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation
Mode while files are being copied. Failure to do so might cause data
loss.
Removing memory media
The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To
remove memory media, do the following:
1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon on the
Windows taskbar.
User's Manual
4-12
12HDMI™ out port
2. Select the memory media that you want to remove.
3. Push the memory media until you hear a click to partially release it.
4. Grasp the media and remove it.
If you remove the memory media or turn off the power while the
computer is accessing the memory media, you might lose data or
damage the media.
Do not remove the memory media while the computer is in Sleep or
Hibernation Mode. The computer might become unstable or data in
the memory media might be lost.
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface™) out port digitally transfers
both video and audio data without reducing the quality. HDMI™-compatible
external display devices including televisions can be connected via the
HDMI™ out port.
As the port operation of all external monitors have not been confirmed,
some display devices might not function properly.
To connect an HDMI™-compatible display device, do the following:
To connect a device to the HDMI™ out port, you must purchase a suitable
HDMI™ cable.
1. Plug one end of the HDMI™ cable into the HDMI™ in port of the
HDMI™ display device.
Turn the HDMI™ display device's power on.
2.
3. Plug the other end of the HDMI™ cable into the HDMI™ out port on
your computer.
Figure 4-5 Connecting the HDMI™ out port
1. HDMI™ out port
2. HDMI™ cable
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
User's Manual
4-13
12Do not plug/unplug an HDMI™ device under the following conditions:
The system is starting up.
The system is shutting down.
When you unplug the HDMI™ cable and replug it, wait at least 5 seconds
before you replug the HDMI™ cable again.
Settings for display video on HDMI™
To view video on the HDMI™ display device, be sure to configure the
settings, otherwise you might find that nothing is displayed.
Be sure to select the display device or audio device before starting to play
video. Do not change the display device or audio device while playing
video.
Do not change the display device under the following conditions.
While data is being read or written
While communication is being carried out
LAN
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,
100BASE-TX) or Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,
1000BASE-T).
This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.
The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the
system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this
feature.
The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes
automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device,
cable or noise and so on).
LAN cable types
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings might cause a
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator regarding
set-up procedures.
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,
1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5e cable or higher. You
cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.
User's Manual
4-14
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-
TX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a
CAT3 cable.
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you
can connect with a CAT3 or higher cable.
Connecting the LAN cable
To connect the LAN cable, do the following:
Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC
adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the
AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system might
hang up.
Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable.
Otherwise, malfunctions or damage might occur.
Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is
connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage might
occur.
Turn off the power to all external devices connected to the computer.
1.
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you
hear the latch click into place.
Figure 4-6 Connecting the LAN cable
1. LAN jack
2. LAN cable
Product appearance depends on the model you purchased.
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector or router.
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor
before using or configuring a network connection.
To disconnect the LAN cable, gently grasp the LAN cable while pressing
the latch, and then slowly lift it up to remove it.
User's Manual
4-15
12Wireless display
Your computer might support wireless display, a wireless technology which
utilizes Wi-Fi® to allow the computer to be wirelessly connected to external
displays including TVs as extended screens. With wireless display,
documents, streamed/local media contents or other online contents can be
shared wirelessly with others.
To use wireless display, either one of the following devices is required:
A compatible external display with built-in support for wireless display.
An external display with HDMI™ port and a wireless display adaptor.
The wireless display adaptor is a device that connects to the external
display via HDMI™ port and can receive Wi-Fi® signals from your
computer.
To wirelessly connect to an external display, you can follow the steps as
described below:
1. Go to
(Settings) and click Devices -> Bluetooth & other devices
-> Add Bluetooth or other device.
2. Click Wireless display or dock. Your computer starts searching for
the wireless display device.
3. After the wireless display device is searched, follow the on-screen
instructions to finish connection.
After the connection is established, the name of the wireless display device
appears under Projectors.
To disconnect the Wireless display device, click the wireless display device
name and then click Remove device.
Security lock
A security lock enables you to anchor your computer to a desk or other
heavy object in order to help prevent unauthorized removal or theft. The
computer has a security lock slot into which you can attach one end of the
security cable, while the other end attaches to a desk or similar object. The
methods used for attaching security cables differ from product to product.
Refer to the instructions for the product you are using for more information.
Connecting the security lock
To connect a security cable to the computer, do the following:
Turn the computer so the security lock slot faces you.
1.
2. Align the security cable with the lock slot and secure it in place.
User's Manual
4-16
Figure 4-7 Security lock
1. Security lock slot
2. Security lock
Optional Accessories
To make your computer even more powerful and convenient to use, you
can add a number of options and accessories. For reference, the following
list details some of the items that are available from your reseller or
dynabook dealer:
AC Adaptor
If you frequently use your computer at more than
one site, it might be convenient to purchase an
additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in
order to remove the need to carry the adaptor
with you always.
Not all the accessories are available in your region. Contact your reseller or
dynabook dealer for more information.
Sound System and Video mode
This section describes some of the audio control functions.
Volume Mixer
The Volume Mixer utility lets you control the audio volume for playback of
devices and applications under Windows.
To launch the Volume Mixer utility, right-click on the speaker icon on
the Windows Taskbar, and then select Open Volume Mixer from the
sub menu.
To adjust the volume level of speakers or headphones, move the
Speakers or Headphones slider.
To adjust the volume level of an application that you are using, move
the slider for the corresponding application.
Microphone Level
To change the microphone recording level, do the following:
1. Click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and
Sound -> Sound -> Recording.
User's Manual
4-17
212. Select Microphone Array or External Microphone, and click
Properties.
3. On the Levels tab, move the Microphone Array or External
Microphone slider to increase or decrease the microphone volume
level.
If you feel the microphone volume level is inadequate while using an
external microphone, move the Microphone Boost slider to a higher level.
Realtek Audio Console
You can confirm and change the audio configuration using the Realtek
Audio Console. To launch the Realtek Audio Console:
Click Start -> Realtek Audio Console.
Main
When you launch the Realtek Audio Console, the Main tab shows all
available Playback and Recording devices. You can adjust the volume and
switch to relate setting pages by clicking the
icon in this tab.
Speakers/Headphones
This tab allows you to set Main Volume, Sound Effects, Default Format and
Speaker configuration.
Click the Auto Test button
internal speakers or the headphone sound is coming from the right
direction.
at the bottom of this tab to confirm the
Microphone Array/External Microphone
This tab allows you to set Main Volume, Microphone Effects and Default
Format.
If the built-in microphones are not equipped, you can connect an external
microphone instead.
Device advanced settings
This tab allows you to choose the type of headphone or microphone and
select devices when an external device is plugged in.
To choose the type of headphone or microphone, do the following:
1. Plug a headphone or microphone into the headphone/microphone
2. Click the Device advanced settings tab.
3. Select one from the device list under ANALOG for the device you
jack.
plugged into.
User's Manual
4-18
When an external headphone or microphone is plugged in, you can turn
on/off the multi-stream function for playback or recording under Playback
Device or Recording Device in this tab.
To use multi-stream function for playback/recording, do the following:
1. Select Make internal and external output devices playback two
different audio streams simultaneously, or Separate all input
jacks as independent input devices.
2. Click Start ->
(Settings) -> System -> Sound.
3. Click App volume and device preferences under Advanced sound
4. Choose different output/input devices for different players/recorders
options.
from the drop-down list.
Power Management
This tab allows you to adjust the configuration of audio power management
to achieve the power saving.
Information
Video mode
This tab shows the driver version and UI version as well.
Video mode settings are configured via the Display dialog.
To open the Display dialog, click Start ->
Display.
(Settings) -> System ->
If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video
playback), you might see some disturbance, flickering, or frame dropping
on your screen.
If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is
displayed properly.
User's Manual
4-19
Chapter 5
Utilities and Advanced Usage
This chapter describes the utilities and special features of this computer,
and the advanced usage of some utilities.
Utilities and Applications
This section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the
computer and details how to start them. For further information on their
operation, refer to online manual, help files, or README.TXT file (if
applicable) of each utility.
You might not have all the software listed in this section depending on the
model you purchased.
System Password
You can set a password in the BIOS setup utility in order to restrict access
to the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the passwords.
Two levels of password security are provided: User and Administrator.
Refer to BIOS setup utility to enter it.
Passwords set in the BIOS setup utility are different from the Windows
password.
An Administrator Password is needed before you set a user password.
If you set an Administrator Password, some functions might be
restricted when a user logs on with the User Password.
When entering the character string to register the password, enter
from the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII
code or copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that
the registered password is correct by outputting the character string to
the password file.
Starting the computer using a password
To enter a password manually, do the following:
1.
Turn on the power as described in the Getting Started section.
User's Manual
5-1
At this point, the function keys do not work. They will function after you
enter the password.
2. Enter the password in the dialog that appears in the screen.
3. Press ENTER.
If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, or if you do not
enter the password within 1 minute, the computer shuts down. In this case,
some features that can power on the computer automatically (Wake-up on
LAN, Task Scheduler, etc) might not work. You must turn the computer
back on to retry password entry.
dynabook Support Utility
dynabook Support Utility allows your computer to automatically search for
alerts from Dynabook that are specific to your computer system and its
programs.
On the initial Internet connection, your computer will send some limited
system information to Dynabook periodically. The transmission is
completely anonymous since no personal identifiable information is
collected.
To access this utility, click Start -> dynabook Support Utility.
The following tabs might be provided:
Home—Displays the introduction of this utility.
Alerts—Allows you to check available alerts.
System Information—Allows you to view basic information of your
computer.
dynabook Screen Rotation Utility
dynabook Screen Rotation Utility rotates the screen orientation between
landscape(normal) and landscape(flipped) by using the Ctrl + Alt + Up
arrow/Down arrow keys.
To access this utility, click Start -> dynabook Screen Rotation Utility.
The following options might be provided:
Screen Rotation—Rotate the screen orientation by using the Ctrl + Alt
+ Up arrow/Down arrow keys.
Confirmation message—Show a confirmation message when the
screen is rotated.
External display message—Show a message when the screen did not
rotate because an external display is connected.
BIOS setup utility
BIOS setup utility provides you a menu-based user interface so that you
can easily view and change BIOS settings.
User's Manual
5-2
To enter the BIOS setup utility, do the following:
1. Save your work.
2. Click Start ->
3. Hold down the F2 key and then release this key just after the
(Power) and then select Restart.
computer is powered on.
Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed.
4.
To save the changes and exit the utility, press the F10 key and proceed by
selecting Yes or select Exit -> Exit Saving Changes -> Yes. The
computer restarts immediately.
dynabook Maintenance Utility
dynabook Maintenance Utility is provided to erase the internal storage
drive. This utility allows you to delete all data and partitions and also
overwrite all sectors on the internal storage drive.
If there is an external hard disk drive connected to your computer, it can
also be erased. However, if you do not want to delete the data from the
external hard disk drive, disconnect it from your computer.
To access this utility:
(Settings) and click Update & Security -> Recovery.
1. Go to
2. Click Restart now under Advanced startup.
3. Click Troubleshoot -> dynabook Maintenance Utility.
If you select the deletion method and continue with the operation, you will
lose all data (including the operating system and recovery partition) on the
internal storage drives. Make sure that you have already created recovery
media if you want to use the computer after erasing your hard disk drive(s).
Special features
The following features are either unique to dynabook computers or are
advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use.
Access each function using the following procedures.
*1 To access the Power Options, click Start -> Windows System ->
Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options.
Display automatic
power off *1
Internal storage drive
automatic power off *1
This feature automatically cuts off power to the
computer's display panel when there is no
keyboard input for a specified time, with power
being restored the next time a key is pressed.
This can be specified in the Power Options.
This feature automatically cuts off power to the
internal storage drive when it is not accessed for
a specified time, with power being restored when
the internal storage drive is next accessed. This
can be specified in the Power Options.
User's Manual
5-3
System automatic
Sleep/Hibernation
Mode *1
Power on password
Intelligent power
supply *1
This feature automatically shuts down the system
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode
when there is no input or hardware access for a
specified time. This can be specified in the Power
Options.
Two levels of password security, administrator
and user, are available to prevent unauthorized
access to your computer.
A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent
power supply detects the battery charge,
automatically calculates the remaining battery
capacity, and protects electronic components
from abnormal conditions such as a voltage
overload from the AC adaptor. This can be
specified in the Power Options.
Battery save mode *1 This feature lets you configure the computer in
order to save battery power. This can be
specified in the Power Options.
Panel power on/off *1 This feature automatically turns power to the
Low battery
automatic Hibernation
Mode *1
Sleep Mode
Hibernation Mode
computer off when the display panel is closed,
and turns it back on when the display panel is
opened. This can be specified in the Power
Options.
When battery power is exhausted to the point
that computer operation cannot be continued, the
system automatically enters Hibernation Mode
and shuts itself down. This can be specified in
the Power Options.
If you have to interrupt your work, you can use
this feature to allow you to turn off power to the
computer without exiting from your software.
Data is maintained in the computer's main
memory so that when you next turn on the
power, you can continue working right where you
left off.
Refer to the Sleep Mode section for more details.
This feature lets you turn off the power to the
computer without exiting from your software. The
contents of main memory are automatically
saved to the internal storage drive so that when
you next turn on the power again, you can
continue working right where you left off. You
must enable the Hibernation Mode before using
this feature. Refer to the Starting Hibernation
Mode section for more details.
User's Manual
5-4
USB Wakeup function This function restores the computer from Sleep
Wake-up on Wireless
LAN
Heat dispersal *1
Mode depending on the external devices
connected to the USB ports.
For example, if a mouse or USB keyboard is
connected to a USB port, clicking the mouse
button or pressing the keyboard will wake up the
computer.
This computer supports the "Wake-up on
Wireless LAN" function. The Wake-up on
Wireless LAN function consumes power even
when the system is in Sleep Mode/Hibernation
Mode. Leave the AC adaptor connected while
using this feature.
To protect against overheating, the processor is
equipped with an internal temperature sensor
which activates a cooling fan or lowers the
processing speed if the computer's internal
temperature rises to a certain level. You are able
to select whether to control this temperature by
either turning on the fan first, then if necessary
lowering the processor speed, or by lowering the
processor speed first, then if necessary turning
on the fan. Both of these functions are controlled
through the Power Options.
When the processor's temperature falls within
normal range, the fan and the processor
operation returns to its standard speed.
If the processor's temperature reaches an
unacceptably high level with either setting, the
computer automatically shuts down to prevent
any damage. In this instance, all unsaved data in
memory will be lost.
User's Manual
5-5
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Dynabook has designed this computer for durability, however, should
problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter
to help determine the cause.
You should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might go
wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place.
Problem-solving process
If you observe the following guidelines, resolving problems will be much
easier.
Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking
further action might result in data loss or damage, or you might
destroy valuable problem-related information that can help solve the
problem.
Observe what is happening. Write down what the system is doing and
what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred.
Make a screenshot of the current display.
Also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this chapter
are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem-solving
techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few might
require help from Technical Support. If you find you need to consult others,
be prepared to describe the problem in as much detail as possible.
Preliminary checklist
You should always consider the simplest solution first. The items detailed
in this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a
serious problem:
Make sure that you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on
the computer - this includes your printer and any other external device
you are using.
Before you attach an external device, you should first turn off the
computer, then when you turn the computer back on, it recognizes the
new device.
Make sure that all optional accessories are configured properly in the
computer's setup program and that all required driver software has
been loaded (refer to the documentation included with the optional
accessories for further information on its installation and
configuration).
User's Manual
6-1
Check all cables to ensure that they are correctly and firmly attached
to the computer - loose cables can cause signal errors.
Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for
loose pins.
Check that your disc media is correctly loaded
Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a
permanent error log - this helps you to describe your problems to Technical
Support. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log you have made helps to
identify the problem faster.
Analyzing the problem
Sometimes the computer gives you clues that can help you identify why it
is malfunctioning. In view of this, keep the following questions in mind:
Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, SSD,
display panel, Touch Pad, Touch Pad control buttons - as each device
produces different symptoms.
Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its
configuration is set properly.
What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or
random characters? Make a screenshot of the current display and, if
possible, look up the messages in the documentation included with the
computer, software, or operating system.
Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as
loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals.
Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do
they stay on or blink? Write down what you see.
Do you hear any beeps, if so, how many, are they long or short and
are they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer
making any unusual noises? Write down what you hear.
Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to Technical
Support.
Software
The problems might be caused by your software
or disk. If you cannot load a software package,
the media might be damaged or the program
might be corrupted. In these instances, try
loading another copy of the software if possible.
If an error message appears while you are using
a software package, you should refer to the
documentation supplied with it as this usually
includes a problem-solving section or a summary
of error messages.
Next, check any error messages against the
operating system documentation.
User's Manual
6-2
Hardware
If you cannot find a software problem, you should
then check the setup and configuration of your
hardware. First run through the items in the
preliminary checklist as described previously,
then, if you still cannot correct the problem, try to
identify the source. The next section provides
checklists for individual components and
peripherals.
Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an
authorized part or product, make sure that the device or software can be
used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices might cause injury
or might damage your computer.
If something goes wrong
Your computer does not respond to the keyboard commands
If an error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard
commands, do the following:
Press the power button and hold it down for ten seconds. Once the
computer has turned itself off, wait 10-15 seconds before turning on the
power again by pressing the power button.
Your program stops responding
If you are working with a program that suddenly freezes all operations,
chances are the program has stopped responding. You can exit the failed
program without shutting down the operating system or closing other
programs.
To close a program that has stopped responding:
1. Press CTRL, ALT, and DEL simultaneously (once), then click Task
Manager. The Windows Task Manager window appears.
2. Select the program you want to close, then click End Task. Closing
the failed program should allow you to continue working. If it does not,
continue with the next step.
3. Close the remaining programs one by one by selecting the program
name, then End Task. Closing all programs should allow you to
continue working. If it does not, power off your computer and then
restart it.
The computer does not start
Make sure that you attached the AC adaptor and power cord/cable
properly.
If you are using the AC adaptor, check that the wall outlet is working by
plugging in another device, such as a lamp.
User's Manual
6-3
Verify that the computer is on by looking at the Power indicator.
If the indicator is glowing, the computer is on. Also, try turning the computer
off and then on.
If you are using an AC adaptor, verify that the computer is receiving power
from the external power source by looking at the DC IN/Battery indicator. If
the indicator is glowing, the computer is connected to a live external power
source.
The computer does not load advanced options during
startup
By holding down one of the following keys during startup, your computer
can load the following advanced options.
Key
F2
F12
Advanced option
BIOS setup utility
Boot Menu
0 (zero)
Recovery options
If your computer starts to load the Operating System instead of desired
advanced options, do the following:
1. Click Start ->
2. Hold down the corresponding key and then release this key just after
(Power) and then select Restart.
the computer is powered on.
Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed.
3.
Hardware and system checklist
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or
attached peripherals. Basic problems might occur in the following areas:
Power
Keyboard
Internal display panel
Internal storage
Memory Media Card
Pointing device
Fingerprint sensor
USB device
Sound system
External monitor
LAN
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth®
Power
When the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery
pack is the primary power source. Your computer also has Real-Time
Clock (RTC) battery. All of the power resources are interrelated with
anyone having the ability to produce apparent power problems.
User's Manual
6-4
Overheating power down
If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with
either setting, the computer automatically shuts down to prevent any
damage. In this instance, all unsaved data in memory is lost.
Problem
Procedure
Computer shuts
down automatically.
Leave the computer off until it reaches room
temperature. If the computer has reached room
temperature and it still does not start, or if it starts
but shuts down quickly, contact Technical Support.
AC power
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected,
check the status of the DC IN/Battery indicator. Refer to the Power
Condition Descriptions section for further information.
Problem
Procedure
AC adaptor does not
power the computer
Check the connections to make sure that the
power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the
computer and a working power outlet.
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If
the cord is frayed or damaged, it should be
replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they
should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth.
If the AC adaptor still does not power the
computer, you should contact Technical Support.
Battery
If you suspect a problem with the battery, check the status of the DC IN/
Battery indicator.
Problem
Procedure
Battery does not
power the computer
The battery might be discharged. Connect the AC
adaptor to recharge the battery.
Battery does not
charge when the AC
adaptor is attached.
If the battery is completely discharged, it will not
begin charging immediately. In these instances,
wait a few minutes before trying again. If the
battery still does not charge, check that the power
outlet of the AC adaptor is connected to its
supplying power. This can be tested by plugging
another appliance into it.
User's Manual
6-5
Problem
Procedure
Battery does not
power the computer
as long as expected
If you frequently recharge a partially charged
battery, the battery might not charge to its full
potential. In these instances, you should fully
discharge the battery and then attempt to charge it
again.
Real-Time Clock
Problem
Procedure
The BIOS setting
and system date/
time are lost.
If the RTC battery becomes completely
discharged, the realtime clock and calendar will
stop working. The RTC battery should be replaced
only by your dealer or by a Dynabook service
representative, and then set the date/time in the
dynabook Setup Utility by using the following
steps:
1.
Launch the BIOS setup utility.
Refer to the BIOS setup utility section for
further information.
2. Set the date in the System Date field.
3. Set the time in the System Time field.
4.
Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed.
BIOS
Problem
Procedure
The computer
cannot be powered
on.
Disconnect the AC adaptor for several seconds
and then reconnect the AC adaptor. After that,
press the power button.
If it still does not work, press and hold the power
button for about 15 seconds.
If it still does not operate properly, you should
contact your reseller or dealer.
Keyboard
Keyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the
computer. Refer to the The Keyboard section for further information.
User's Manual
6-6
Problem
Procedure
Output to screen is
garbled
Refer to your software documentation to ensure
that it is not remapping the keyboard in any way
(remapping involves changing or reassigning the
function of each key).
If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you
should contact Technical Support.
Internal display panel
Apparent problems of the computer's display panel might be related to
setup and configuration of the computer.
Problem
No display
Procedure
Markings appear on
the computer's
display panel.
Press the function keys to adjust the display
priority, and to make sure that it is not set for
output to an external monitor.
These marks might have come from contact with
the keyboard and Touch Pad while the display
panel has been closed. Try to remove the marks
by gently wiping the display panel with a clean dry
cloth or, if this fails, with a good quality LCD screen
cleaner. In this latter instance, you should always
follow the instructions with the screen cleaner and
always ensure that you let the display panel dry
properly before closing it.
Internal Storage Drive
Problem
Procedure
Computer does not
boot from internal
storage
Check to see whether there is a disc in the external
optical disc drive - if so remove it and try to start
the computer again.
If this has no effect, check the Boot Priority Options
setting under Boot within the BIOS setup utility.
User's Manual
6-7
Problem
Procedure
Slow performance
The files on the internal storage drive might be
fragmented. In this instance you should run the
disk defragmentation utility to check the condition
of your files and the internal storage drive. Refer to
the operating system's documentation or online
Help File for further information on operating and
using the defragmentation utility.
As a last resort, you should reformat the internal
storage drive and then reload the operating system
and all other files and data. If you are still unable to
resolve the problem, contact Technical Support.
Memory Media Card
For further information, refer to Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
Memory media card
error occurs
Remove the memory media card from the
computer and then reinsert it to ensure that it is
firmly connected.
If the problem persists, then you should refer to the
documentation supplied with your memory media
card for further information.
You cannot read a
file
Check to ensure that the required file is actually on
the memory media card that is inserted into the
computer.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact Technical Support.
Pointing device
If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB
mouse section and the documentation supplied with your mouse.
Touch Pad
Problem
Procedure
The Touch Pad does
not work.
Check the device settings.
Click Start ->
Touchpad.
(Settings) -> Devices ->
User's Manual
6-8
Problem
Procedure
Mouse pointer does
not respond to
pointing device
operation
In this instance, the system might be busy. Try
moving the mouse again after waiting a short
while.
Double-tapping
(Touch Pad) does
not work
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse
Control utility.
1.
To access this utility, click Start -> Windows
System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and
Sound -> Mouse.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the
3. Set the double-click speed as required and
Buttons tab.
click OK.
The mouse pointer
moves too fast or too
slow
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the cursor speed within the Touch Pad settings.
To access it, click Start ->
Devices -> Touchpad.
(Settings) ->
The reaction of
Touch Pad is either
too sensitive or not
sensitive enough.
Adjust the touch sensitivity.
To access it, click Start ->
Devices -> Touchpad.
(Settings) ->
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact Technical Support.
USB mouse
Problem
Procedure
Mouse pointer does
not respond to
mouse operation
In this instance, the system might be busy. Try
moving the mouse again after waiting a short
while.
Remove the mouse from the computer and then
reconnect it to a free USB port in order to ensure
that it is firmly attached.
User's Manual
6-9
Problem
Procedure
Double-clicking does
not work
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse
Control utility.
1.
To access this utility, click Start -> Windows
System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and
Sound -> Mouse.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the
3. Set the double-click speed as required and
Buttons tab.
click OK.
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.
1.
To access this utility, click Start -> Windows
System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and
Sound -> Mouse.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the
Pointer Options tab.
3. Set the mouse pointer speed as required and
click OK.
The elements of the mouse responsible for
detecting movement might be dirty. Refer to the
documentation supplied with the mouse for
instructions on how to clean it.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact Technical Support.
The mouse pointer
moves too fast or too
slow
The mouse pointer
moves erratically
User's Manual
6-10
Fingerprint sensor
Problem
Procedure
Fingerprints cannot
be registered or
deleted.
1. Save your work.
2. Click Start ->
Restart.
(Power) and then select
3. Hold down the F2 key and then release this
key just after the computer is power on to
show the BIOS Setup Utility.
4. Select Security -> BIOS Password ->
Supervisor, and then register the Supervisor
Password. (If the User Password has been
registered, clear it first.)
5. Select Clear Fingerprint data, and then
press Yes.
6. Clear Supervisor Password. (If necessary,
7.
register the User Password again after that.)
To save the changes and exit the utility, press
the F10 key and proceed by selecting Yes or
select Exit -> Exit Saving Changes -> Yes.
The computer restarts immediately.
USB device
In addition to the information in this section, also refer to the documentation
supplied with your USB device.
Problem
Procedure
USB device does not
work
Remove the USB device from the computer and
then reconnect it to a free port in order to ensure
that it is firmly attached.
Ensure that any required USB device drivers are
properly installed. To achieve this, you should refer
to both the device documentation and the
operating system documentation.
Sound system
In addition to the information in this section, also refer to the documentation
supplied with your audio device.
User's Manual
6-11
Problem
Procedure
No sound is heard
Press the function keys to increase or decrease
volume.
Annoying sound is
heard
Check the software volume settings.
Check to see if Mute is turned to Off.
Check to make sure that the headphone
connection is secure.
Check within the Windows Device Manager
application to ensure that the sound device is
enabled and that the device is properly working.
In this instance, you might be experiencing
feedback from either the internal microphone or an
external microphone connected to the computer.
Refer to Sound System and Video mode for further
information.
Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows start
up or shut down.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact Technical Support.
External monitor
Also refer to Operating Basics, and to the documentation supplied with
your monitor for further information.
Problem
Procedure
Monitor does not
turn on
After confirming that the monitor's power switch is
on, check the connections to make sure that the
power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the
monitor and to a working power outlet.
User's Manual
6-12
Problem
No display
Procedure
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls
on the external monitor.
Press the function key in order to change the
display priority and ensure that it is not set for the
internal display only.
Check to see if the external monitor is connected.
When the external monitor is set as the primary
display device in extended desktop mode, it does
not display when the computer wakes up from
Sleep Mode if the external monitor has been
disconnected while in Sleep Mode.
To keep this from happening, do not disconnect
the external monitor while the computer is in Sleep
or Hibernation Mode.
Remember to turn off the computer before
disconnecting the external monitor.
When the display panel and an external monitor
are set to clone mode and they are turned off by
the timer, the display panel or the external monitor
might not display when turned on again.
If this occurs, press the function key to reset the
display panel and external monitor to Clone Mode.
When booting up the computer, screen of BIOS
setting and etc. might not be indicated correctly if
the power saving function of external monitor is
enabled. In this case, turn the power of external
monitor OFF and ON once (to disable power
saving function) and then restart your computer.
Display error occurs Check that the cable connecting the external
monitor to the computer is firmly attached.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact Technical Support.
LAN
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access LAN Check for a firm cable connection between the
LAN jack and the LAN hub.
User's Manual
6-13
Problem
Procedure
Wake-up on LAN
does not work
Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even
when the system is off.
If problems persist, consult your LAN administrator.
Wireless LAN
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access
Wireless LAN
Make sure that the wireless communication
function of the computer is on.
If problems persist, contact your LAN
administrator.
Bluetooth®
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access
Bluetooth® device
Check to ensure that the wireless communication
function of the computer is on.
Check to ensure that power to the external
Bluetooth® device is turned on.
Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth®
Adaptor is installed in the computer. The built-in
Bluetooth® hardware cannot operate
simultaneously with another Bluetooth® controller.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact Technical Support.
Technical support
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having
problems operating the computer, you might need to contact us for
additional technical assistance.
Before you call
Some problems you experience might be related to software or the
operating system, so it is important that you investigate other sources of
assistance first. Before contacting, try the following:
Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with
your software and/or peripheral devices.
User's Manual
6-14
If a problem occurs when you are running software applications,
consult the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions
and consider calling the software company's technical support
department for assistance.
Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your
computer and/or software - they are your best resource for current
information and support.
Technical support
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware-
related, refer to the information listed in the accompanying warranty
booklet.
User's Manual
6-15
Chapter 7
Appendix
Specifications
This section summarizes the technical specifications of the computer.
Physical Dimensions
The physical dimensions vary depending on the model you purchased.
Size
Approximately 283.8 (w) x 197.5 (d) x 19.9 (h) millimeters
(not including parts that extend beyond the main body)
Environmental Requirements
Conditions
Operating
Non-operating
Ambient temperature Relative humidity
5°C (41°F) to 35°C
(95°F)
20% to 80%
(noncondensing)
-20°C (-4°F) to 60°C
(140°F)
10% to 90%
(noncondensing)
Wet-bulb temperature 29°C maximum
Conditions
Altitude (from sea
level)
Operating
-60 to 3,000 meters
Non-operating
-60 to 10,000 meters
maximum
Power Requirements
AC adaptor
100-240V AC
50 Hz or 60 Hz (cycles per second)
Computer
19V DC
User's Manual
7-1
Japan:
Europe:
Austria:
Belgium:
Denmark:
Finland:
France:
Germany:
AC Power Cord and Connectors
The AC input plug of the power cord must be compatible with the various
international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for
the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following
specifications:
Wire size:
Minimum 0.75 mm2
Current rating:
Minimum 2.5 amperes
Certification agencies
China:
CQC
U.S. and Canada:
UL listed and CSA certified
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2
Australia:
AS
DENANHO
OVE
Italy:
IMQ
CEBEC
The Netherlands:
KEMA
DEMKO
Norway:
FIMKO
Sweden:
NEMKO
SEMKO
LCIE
VDE
Switzerland:
SEV
United Kingdom:
BSI
In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or
H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type,
H05VV-F.
For the United States and Canada, two-pin plug configuration must be
2-15P (250 V) or 1-15P (125 V) and three-pin plug configuration must be
6-15P (250 V) or 5-15P (125 V) as designated in the U.S. National
Electrical Code Handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and
Canada, the United Kingdom, Australia, Europe, Middle-East, Africa, South
Africa, Switzerland, Italy and China.
User's Manual
7-2
USA
United Kingdom, South Africa,
Middle-East
UL approved
Australia
AS approved
BS approved
Europe, Africa, South Africa,
Middle-East
Approved by the appropriate
agency
Canada
China
CSA approved
State of Israel
CCC approved
Africa
SII approved
Switzerland
Approved by the appropriate
agency
Italy
Approved by the appropriate
agency
Approved by the appropriate
agency
Information for Wireless Devices
Wireless Technology Interoperability
The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems with Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) /Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:
The IEEE 802.11 Standard on Wireless LANs (Revision a/b/g/n/ac/ax),
as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers.
User's Manual
7-3
Bluetooth® Modules are designed to be interoperable with any product with
Bluetooth® wireless technology that is based on Frequency Hopping
Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:
Bluetooth® Specification (depending on the model you purchased), as
defined and approved by the Bluetooth® Special Interest Group.
Logo certification with Bluetooth® wireless technology as defined by
the Bluetooth® Special Interest Group.
This Bluetooth® product is not compatible with devices using Bluetooth®
Version 1.0B specifications.
The wireless devices have not completed verification of connection and
operation with all devices which are using the Wireless LAN or Bluetooth®
radio technology.
Bluetooth® and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio
frequency range and might interfere with one another. If you use
Bluetooth® and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you might
occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or even
lose your network connection.
If you experience any such problem, immediately turn off either one of your
Bluetooth® or Wireless LAN.
Wireless devices and your health
Wireless products, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency
electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by wireless products
however is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by
wireless devices like for example mobile phones.
Because wireless products operate within the guidelines found in radio
frequency safety standards and recommendations, Dynabook believes
wireless products are safe for use by consumers. These standards and
recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and
result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who
continually review and interpret the extensive research literature.
In some situations or environments, the use of wireless products might be
restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of
the organization. These situations might for example include:
Using the wireless products equipment on board of airplanes, or
In any other environment where the risk of interference to other
devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful.
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices
in a specific organization or environment (for example, airports), you are
encouraged to ask for authorization to use the wireless device prior to
turning on the equipment.
User's Manual
7-4
Wireless LAN Technology
The wireless communication function of the computer supports some
wireless communication devices.
Only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth®
functions.
Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi®) or Bluetooth® functionalities
near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or
magnetic fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source
can disrupt Wi-Fi® or Bluetooth® operation.
Turn off all wireless functionalities when near a person who might
have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device.
Radio waves might affect pacemaker or medical device operation,
possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction for your
medical device when using any wireless functionality.
Always turn off wireless functionality if the computer is near automatic
control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire
detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,
possibly resulting in serious injury.
It might not be possible to make a network connection to a specified
network name using the ad hoc network function. If this occurs, the
new network (*) has to be configured for all computers connected to
the same network in order to re-enable network connections.
* Make sure to use new network name.
Security
Dynabook strongly recommends that you enable encryption
functionality, otherwise your computer is open to illegal access by an
outsider using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider might
illegally access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or
destruction of stored data.
Dynabook is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or
illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof.
Card Specifications
Compatibility
IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANs
Network Operating
System
Media Access
Protocol
Microsoft Windows Networking
CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with
Acknowledgment (ACK)
Radio Characteristics
Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN module might vary according to:
User's Manual
7-5
Country/region where the product was purchased
Type of product
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations.
Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed
for operation in the license-free 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, local radio
regulations might impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless
communication equipment.
Radio Frequency
Band 5 GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision a,
n, ac and ax)
Band 2.4 GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision
b/g, n and ax)
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the
wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range might
travel larger distances.
The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the
antennas are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density
materials.
Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the
radio that might either absorb or reflect the radio signal.
Radio Frequency Interference Requirements
This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to
5.25GHz frequency range.
High-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the
bands 5.25 to 5.35GHz and 5.65 to 5.85GHz and that these radars could
cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
Bluetooth® wireless technology
Some computers in this series have Bluetooth® wireless communication
function which eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices
such as computers, printers, and mobile phones. When it is enabled,
Bluetooth® provides a safe and trustworthy wireless personal area network
environment that is quick and easy.
You cannot use the built-in Bluetooth® functions of the computer and an
external Bluetooth® adaptor simultaneously. For reference, Bluetooth®
wireless technology has the following features:
Security
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:
Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible
to falsify the origin of a message.
Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.
User's Manual
7-6
Worldwide operation
The Bluetooth® radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4 GHz band,
which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries
in the world.
Radio links
You can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these
links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of
each other.
Radio Regulatory Information
The Wireless device must be installed and used in strict accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions as described in the user documentation that
comes with the product. This product complies with the following radio
frequency and safety standards.
Europe
Azerbaijan:
Restrictions for Use of 2400.0-2483.5MHz Frequencies in Europe
Limited
implementation
No license needed if used indoor and
power not exceeding 30 mW
(14.77dBm).
Italy:
Implemented
The public use is subject to general
authorisation by the respective service
provider.
User's Manual
7-7
ITRussian
Federation:
Limited
implementation
Using SRD (Short Range Device) with
FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread
Spectrum) modulation.
1. Maximum 2.5mW (4dBm) EIRP
(Equivalent Isotropically Radiated
Power) is permitted to use.
2. Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
is permitted to use with the
following conditions:
Permitted to use SRD for outdoor
applications without restriction on
installation height only for
purposes of gathering telemetry
information for automated
monitoring and resources
accounting systems. Permitted to
use SRD for other purposes for
outdoor applications only when
the installation height is not
exceeding 10m above the ground
surface.
3. Maximum 100mW (20dBm)
EIRP.
Indoor applications is permitted
to use.
User's Manual
7-8
Using SRD with DSSS (Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum) and
other than FHSS wideband
modulation.
1. Maximum EIRP density is 2mW/
MHz. Maximum100mW (20dBm)
EIRP is permitted to use.
2. Maximum EIRP density is 20mW/
MHz. Maximum 100mW (20dBm)
EIRP is permitted to use with the
following condition:
It is permitted to use SRD for
outdoor applications only for
purposes of gathering telemetry
information for automated
monitoring and resources
accounting systems or security
systems.
3. Maximum EIRP density is 10mW/
MHz. Maximum 100mW (20dBm)
EIRP.
Indoor applications is permitted
to use.
Ukraine:
Limited
implementation
EIRP =100mW (20dBm) with built-in
antenna’s maximum gain is 6dBi.
Restrictions for Use of 5725-5875MHz Frequencies in Europe
Russian
Federation:
Limited
implementation
When duty cycle is 0.1% or using
LBT (Listen Before Talk)
technology. Antenna height should
not exceed 5m, with maximum
EIRP 25mW (13.98dBm) is
permitted to use.
Software Version and Maximum Power Output of the Wireless
Module
Europe: model AX201D2W
Software Version
Intel® PROSet/Wireless WiFi
Software 21.x and following
versions
User's Manual
7-9
SAR Value
0.42 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H)
0.92 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H)
Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n/ax mode / Bluetooth
Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE
Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac/ax mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac/ax mode
Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP
The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for
indoor use only.
Maximum 25mW (13.98dBm) EIRP
Europe: model 9462D2W
Software Version
SAR Value
Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode / Bluetooth
Intel® PROSet/Wireless WiFi
Software 21.x and following
versions
0.5 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H)
0.91 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H)
Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE
Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP
The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for
indoor use only.
Maximum 25mW (13.98dBm) EIRP
Europe: model 9560D2W
Software Version
Intel® PROSet/Wireless WiFi
Software 21.x and following
versions
0.43 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H)
SAR Value
0.99 W/kg (10g) *
Maximum Power Output
User's Manual
7-10
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode / Bluetooth
Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE
Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP
The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for
indoor use only.
Maximum 25mW (13.98dBm) EIRP
* The SAR value shown is the reference value for the unit based on the
actual value of the installed WiFi and/or WLAN module.
Europe: model 3165D2W
Software Version
Intel® PROSet/Wireless WiFi
Software 21.x and following
versions
SAR Value
0.57 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H)
Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE /
Bluetooth
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
Europe: model AW-CM251NF
Software Version
SAR Value
Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode / Bluetooth
Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP
Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP
The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for
indoor use only.
AZ_QCA9377_6174_Win10_r105x
and following versions
0.90 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H)
0.56 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H)
Maximum 126mW (21dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE
Maximum 50mW (17dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
Maximum 32mW (15dBm) EIRP
The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for
indoor use only.
User's Manual
7-11
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
Maximum 32mW (15dBm) EIRP
To remain in conformance with European spectrum usage laws for
Wireless LAN operation, the above 2.4GHz and 5GHz channel limitations
apply for outdoor usage. The user should use the wireless LAN utility to
check the current channel of operation. If operation is occurring outside of
the allowable frequencies for outdoor use, as listed above, the user must
contact the applicable national spectrum regulator to request a license for
outdoor operation.
Canada - Industry Canada (IC)
This device complies with RSS-247 of the Industry Canada Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Ce dispositif est conforme à la norme CNR-247 d'Industrie Canada
applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est
sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de
brouillage préjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage
reçu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement
indésirable.
Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5.15-5.25GHz sont réservés
uniquement pour une utilisation à l'intérieur afin de réduire les risques de
brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les
mêmes canaux.
Les utilisateurs devraient aussi être avisés que les utilisateurs de radars de
haute puissance sont désignés utilisateurs principaux (c.-à-d., qu'ils ont la
priorité) pour les bandes 5.25-5.35GHz et 5.65-5.85GHz et que ces radars
pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-
EL.
The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only signifies that
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
Refer to the FCC information section for the detailed information.
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the Wireless device is far below the FCC
radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Wireless device shall be
User's Manual
7-12
used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal
operation is minimized.
In the usual operating configuration, the distance between the antenna and
the user should not be less than 20cm. Please refer to the computer user’s
manual for the details regarding antenna location.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is
located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health
Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable
from Health Canada’s website www.hc-sc.gc.ca
Caution: Radio Frequency Interference Requirements
This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to
5.25GHz frequency range.
High-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the
bands 5.25 to 5.35GHz and 5.65 to 5.85GHz and that these radars could
cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
Taiwan
Article 12
Article 14
Without permission granted by the NCC, any
company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to
change frequency, enhance transmitting power or
alter original characteristic as well as performance
to any approved low power radio frequency
devices.
The low power radio-frequency devices shall not
influence aircraft security and interfere legal
communications.
If found, the user shall cease operating
immediately until no interference is achieved.
The said legal communications means radio
communications is operated in compliance with the
Telecommunications Act.
The low power radio-frequency devices must be
susceptible with the interference from legal
communications or ISM radio wave radiated
devices.
Australia and New Zealand regulatory compliance
This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. When used in the
Clamshell mode, a separation distance of 20cm from the antennas will
ensure the radio frequency exposure level complies with the Australian and
New Zealand Standards.
User's Manual
7-13
Using this equipment in Japan
In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400MHz to 2,483.5MHz for second
generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment
overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station
and specified low-power radio station).
1. Important notice
The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate within the same
range as industrial devices, scientific devices, medical devices, microwave
ovens, licensed radio stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio
stations for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in factory
production lines (Other Radio Stations).
1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not interfere with any
2.
of the equipment listed above.
If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio stations,
promptly change the frequency being used, change the location of
use, or turn off the source of emissions.
3. Contact an authorized service provider if you have problems with
interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations.
2. Indication for Wireless LAN
The indication shown below appears on this equipment.
2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.
1.
2. DS : This equipment uses DS-SS modulation.
3. OF : This equipment uses OFDM modulation.
4.
5.
4 : The interference range of this equipment is less than 40 m.
: This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from 2,400 MHz
to 2,483.5 MHz. It is possible to avoid the band of mobile object
identification systems.
3. Indication for Bluetooth®
The indication shown below appears on this equipment.
User's Manual
7-14
(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(4)(1)(2)(3)11.
2.
3.
4.
2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.
FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation.
1 : The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.
: This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from 2,400 MHz
to 2,483.5 MHz. It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object
identification systems.
4. About the JEITA
5 GHz Wireless LAN supports W52/W53/W56 Channel.
Device Authorization
This device obtains the Technical Regulation Conformity Certification and it
belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data
communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications
Business Law of Japan.
Intel® Wi-Fi® 6 AX201
The Name of the radio equipment: AX201D2W
DSP Research, Inc.
Approval Number: D180132003
Intel® Wi-Fi® 6 9462
The Name of the radio equipment: 9462D2W
DSP Research, Inc.
Approval Number: D170149003
Intel® Dual Band Wireless-AC 9560
The Name of the radio equipment: 9560D2W
DSP Research, Inc.
Approval Number: D170150003
Intel® Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165
The Name of the radio equipment: 3165D2W
DSP Research, Inc.
Approval Number: D150112003
Azure Wave Wi-Fi 5 AW-CM251
The Name of the radio equipment: AW-CM251NF
DSP Research, Inc.
Approval Number: D150133003
The following restrictions apply:
User's Manual
7-15
/ax/axDo not disassemble or modify the device.
Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device.
Accessibility
Accessibility options provided by Windows 10 operating system are
accessible through Ease of Access features of Windows settings. It allows
you customise your Dynabook notebook the way you want to use it. To see
the available features in one of the following ways:
Go to Start and select
(Settings).
For touch screen, slide your finger inward from the screen’s right edge
inward and tap the
(All Settings) icon.
Using a keyboard, press the
word Settings, then press Enter.
( Windows key ) + I, scroll up to the
Then select Ease of Access
from the Windows Settings screen.
Ease of Access for Dynabook notebook
Ease of access options provides those with learning, vision, hearing,
mobility and other impairments with the following features categories.
Vision
Display: To change of text similar to zoom in or out in browser or
using the magnifying glass option. You can personalise your
background and other colours. Show animations, transparency and
automatically hide scroll bars in Windows can be enabled or disabled.
The Show notification can be adjusted for 5 seconds, 7 seconds, 15
seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute and 5 minutes.
Cursor & pointer: Makes pointer, cursor and touch feedback easier
to see. Change pointer size and colour, cursor thickness, touch
feedback and make visual feedback for touch points darker and larger.
Magnifier: Makes part or all of your screen bigger allowing words and
images easier to see. For more information, refer to Use Magnifier to
make things on the screen easier to see.
Colour Filters: Makes photos and colours easier to see by applying a
colour filter to your screen. Toggle Turn on colour filters to enable or
disable this feature. Then, select a colour filter from the menu and see
which one best suits you.
High contrast: This can be turned on using the toggle under Turn on
high contrast. Then, choose a theme from the drop-down menu to
customise colour for links and button text. To turn high contrast mode
on or off from the sign-in screen, select the Ease of access button
, then turn on the toggle under High Contrast. From the keyboard
press Left Alt + Left Shift + Print Screen.
Narrator: Screen-reading app built into Windows 10. For more
information, refer to How to use Narrator.
User's Manual
7-16
Click here for more information about making your device easier to see or
use without a screen.
Hearing
Audio: For those with hearing difficulties, this option makes it easier to
hear with features like Hear all sounds in one channel, and Display
audio alerts visually.
Closed captions: Lets you read the word spoken in the audio portion
of a video, TV show or Movie that supports Closed Caption
technology. You can select the settings you want and see how they
appear in Preview.
Click here for more information about making your device easier to hear or
use with these visual alternatives to sound.
Interaction
Speech: Talk instead of type. Press the
start dictation or select the microphone button on the touch keyboard.
Cortana, the Windows 10 built-in digital assistant can help with setting
reminders, opening apps, finding facts, and sending emails and text
messages.
(Windows key) + H to
Cortana is only available in certain countries and some Cortana
features might not be available everywhere.
Keyboard: Among many other features, this option allows those with
limited typing ability to type by pointing and clicking.
Mouse: Allows you to change the size, color of the mouse pointer
making it easier to view. Other mouse properties settings are
customizable through the Additional mouse options.
Eye control: Allows you to setup an eye tracking device. Refer to
Compatible Eye tracking device for more information.
For more information about Ease of Access and other accessibility features
with the preloaded Windows 10 operating system, click here.
Others
All ports used for input or output device connections are industry
standards and can be used to connect to any industry standard
compatible third party devices.
Power On/Off: User can choose to have their notebook go to sleep
mode to avoid having to manually power off or click on Start and then
select
more information on this feature. The notebook can be configured to
resume when the lid is open without having to push the power on
button. This can be specified in the Power Options. Right click on the
battery icon
(Power) > Shutdown when closing the lid. Click here for
in task bar and select Power Options to configure.
User's Manual
7-17
Sign-in options: Windows offer a number of sign-in options including
biometric and non-biometric, refer to Sign-in options in Chapter 2 of
the user’s manual.
Touch Pad: The Touch Pad on the palm rest support several
features, refer to Using the Touch Pad section for more information.
Keyboard: The number of keys available on your keyboard depends
on which region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being
available for numerous languages. There are different types of keys,
functions keys, Windows special keys, and the keypad overlay. Refer
to The Keyboard section for more information.
Fingerprint Sensor: Some notebooks configuration have fingerprint
sensor for enrolling and recognizing fingerprints. Refer to Using the
Fingerprint Sensor section for more information.
Battery: When the AC adaptor is not connected, the main power
source of the computer is the main battery. Refer to the Battery
section for information about charging and caring of the battery pack.
Memory Media: The computer is equipped with a memory media slot
that can accommodate some kinds of memory media with various
memory capacities so that you can transfer data between devices.
Refer to Memory media section for more information.
HDMI™ out port: HDMI out port digitally transfers both video and
audio data and can be connected to HDMI™compatible external
display. Refer to The HDMI™ out port section for more information.
LAN: Your computer may have built-in Ethernet LAN (10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX or Gigabit Ethernet LAN 1000BASE-T). Refer to LAN
section for more information on how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.
Wireless Display: Your computer might support wireless display, a
wireless technology which utilizes WiFi to allow the computer to be
wirelessly connected to external displays including TVs as extended
screens. Refer to Wireless display section for more information.
Security Lock: This feature enables you to anchor your computer to a
desk or other object in order to prevent unauthorised removal or theft.
Refer to Security lock section for more information.
Sound System and Video mode: This section describes some of the
audio controls functions such as volume mixer, Microphone level,
Realtek Audio Console and video modes. Refer to Sound Systems
and Video mode section for more information.
Utilities and Advanced Usage: Your computer comes with pre-
installed utilities such as dynabook Support Utility, BIOS setup utility
(including System Password, etc), and dynabook Maintenance Utility.
Refer to Utilities and Advanced Usage section for more information.
You might have all the software listed depending on the model you
purchased.
User's Manual
7-18
Special features: If your computer may come pre-installed with
several special features such as Display automatic power off, Internal
storage drive automatic power off, System automatic Sleep/
Hibernation Mode, Power on password, Intelligent power supply,
Battery save mode, Panel power on/off, Low battery automatic
Hibernation Mode, Sleep Mode, Hibernation Mode, USB Wakeup
function, Wake-up on Wireless LAN, and Heat dispersal. Refer to
Special features section for more information.
Troubleshooting: Dynabook has designed this computer for
durability, however, should problems occur you are able to use the
procedures detailed in the Troubleshooting section to help determine
the cause. You should familiarize yourself with this section as knowing
what might go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the
first place.
Support: Please visit our support website support.dynabook.com if
you need further assistance.
Legal Footnotes
Non-applicable Icons
Certain computer chassis are designed to accommodate all possible
configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, be aware that your
selected model might not have all the features and specifications
corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the computer
chassis.
CPU
CPU performance in your computer product might vary from specifications
under the following conditions:
use of certain external peripheral products
use of battery power instead of AC power
use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video
applications
use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections
use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided
design applications
use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously
use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000
meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)
use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 30°C (41
-86°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature references are
approximate and might vary depending on the specific computer
model - contact Technical support for details).
CPU performance might also vary from specifications due to design
configuration.
User's Manual
7-19
Under some conditions, your computer product might automatically shut
down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost
data or damage to the product when used outside recommended
conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data
by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum
performance, use your computer product only under recommended
conditions. Read additional restrictions in your product documentation.
Contact technical service and support, refer to Technical support section
for more information.
64-Bit Computing
Certain 32-bit device drivers and/or applications might not be compatible
with a 64-bit CPU/operating system and therefore might not function
properly.
Memory (Main System)
Part of the main system memory might be used by the graphics system for
graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system
memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main
system memory allocated to support graphics might vary depending on the
graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size, and other
factors.
Battery Life
Battery life might vary considerably depending on product model,
configuration, applications, power management settings, and features
utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the
design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are
achieved on select models and configurations tested by Dynabook at the
time of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery
might not charge while computer is consuming full power.
After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery loses its
ability to perform at maximum capacity and needs to be replaced. This is a
normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery pack, see
the accessories information that is shipped with your computer.
Internal Storage Drive Capacity
1 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10.
The computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using
powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and
therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also
be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems,
such as Microsoft Operating System and/or pre-installed software
applications, or media content. Actual formatted capacity might vary.
User's Manual
7-20
LCD
Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the
brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic
characteristic of LCD technology.
Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode.
Screen dims when the computer is operated on battery power and you
might not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.
Graphics Processing Unit (GPU)
Graphics processing unit (GPU) performance might vary depending on
product model, design configuration, applications, power management
settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when
operating in AC power mode and might decrease considerably when
operating in battery power mode.
Total Available Graphics Memory is the total of, as applicable, Dedicated
Video Memory, System Video Memory and Shared System Memory.
Shared System Memory varies depending on system memory size and
other factors.
Wireless LAN
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which
wireless LAN can reach might vary depending on surrounding
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.
The actual transmission speed is lower than the theoretical maximum
speed.
Copy Protection
Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may
prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media.
Glossary
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate
naming is included for reference.
Abbreviations
AC:
AMT:
ASCII:
BIOS:
BD-ROM:
Alternating Current
Intel® Active Management Technology
American Standard Code for Information
Interchange
Basic Input/output System
Blu-ray Disc™ Read-only Memory
User's Manual
7-21
bps:
CD:
CD-ROM:
CD-RW:
CMOS:
CPU:
DC:
DDR:
DIMM:
DVD:
DVD-R:
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R DL:
DVD-ROM:
DVD-RW:
DVD+R DL:
FAT:
FCC:
FHD:
GB:
GBps:
HD:
HD+:
HDD:
HTML:
IEEE:
I/O:
IRQ:
ISP:
KB:
LAN:
LCD:
bits per second
Compact Disc
Compact Disc Read-only Memory
Compact Disc-rewritable
Complementary Metal-oxide Semiconductor
Central Processing Unit
Direct Current
Double Data Rate
Dual Inline Memory Module
Digital Versatile Disc
Digital Versatile Disc-recordable
Digital Versatile Disc-random Access Memory
Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual Layer
Digital Versatile Disc-read Only Memory
Digital Versatile Disc-rewritable
Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double Layer
File Allocation Table
Federal Communications Commission
Full High Definition
gigabyte
gigabytes per second
High Definition
High Definition Plus
Hard Disk Drive
Input/Output
interrupt request
Internet Service Provider
kilobyte
Local Area Network
Liquid Crystal Display
HDMI™:
HDMI™ CEC:
High-definition Multimedia Interface™
High-definition Multimedia Interface™ Consumer
Electronics Control
Hypertext Markup Language
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
User's Manual
7-22
LED:
MB:
MBps:
MMC:
OCR:
PC:
PCI:
PCMCIA:
RAM:
RGB:
RFI:
ROM:
RTC:
S/P DIF:
SD:
SDHC:
SDXC:
SDRAM:
SSD:
TFT:
URL:
USB:
WAN:
WQHD:
www:
Light Emitting Diode
megabyte
megabytes per second
MultiMediaCard
Optical Character Recognition (Reader)
Personal Computer
Peripheral Component Interconnect
Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association
Random Access Memory
Red, Green, and Blue
Radio Frequency Interference
Read-Only Memory
Real-Time Clock
Sony/philips Digital Interface Format
Secure Digital
Secure Digital High Capacity
Secure Digital Extended Capacity
Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
Solid-State Drive
Thin-film Transistor
Uniform Resource Locator
Universal Serial Bus
Wide Area Network
Wide Quad High Definition
World Wide Web
User's Manual
7-23
Index
A
B
C
D
E
AC adaptor
additional 4-17
connecting 2-2
DC IN 19V jack 3-2
Battery
extending life 4-10
monitoring capacity 4-8
real time clock 3-8, 4-6
save mode 5-4
Bluetooth® 7-6
Cleaning the computer 1-18
DC IN/Battery indicator 3-9
Display
automatic power off 5-3
screen 3-6
Documentation list 2-1
Dual Pointing Device
Touch Pad 6-8
Equipment checklist 2-1
External monitor
problems 6-12
Graphics Processing Unit 3-8
Hard disk drive
automatic power off 5-3
Keyboard
function keys 4-3
Function keys F1...F12 4-3
problems 6-6
Windows special key 4-4
LAN
cable types 4-14
connecting 4-15
LAN jack 4-15
Media care
Card care 4-11
Memory card care 4-11
memory media card
inserting 4-12
removing 4-12
G
H
K
L
M
User's Manual
Index-1
Memory media slot 4-10
microSD/SDHC/SDXC Card
note 4-11
Moving the computer 1-19
P
Password
power on 5-4
Power
Hibernation Mode 2-10
panel on/off 5-4
Shut Down mode 2-8
Sleep Mode 2-9
turning off 2-8
turning on 2-5
Problems
AC power 6-5
Analyzing the problem 6-2
Battery 6-5
Dual Pointing device 6-8
External monitor 6-12
Hardware and system
checklist 6-4
HDD 6-7, 6-8
Internal display panel 6-7
Keyboard 6-6
Memory Media Card 6-8
Overheating power
down 6-5
Power 6-4
Real Time Clock 6-6
Sound system 6-11
Technical support 6-14
Touch Pad 6-8
USB device 6-11
USB mouse 6-9
R
S
U
V
W
Recovery hard disk drive 2-14
Recovery Media 2-14
SD/SDHC/SDXC Card
formatting 4-11
Security lock 4-16
Sleep Mode
setting 2-9
System automatic 5-4
Sound system
problems 6-11
USB device
problems 6-11
Video mode 4-19
Video RAM 3-8
Web Camera 3-6
Wireless communication 7-5
User's Manual
Index-2
various | 7.User Manual Rev0513 | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release |
User's Manual SATELLITE PRO C40-G/C40-H/C50-G/
C50-H Table of Contents Legal, Regulatory, and Safety Copyright, Disclaimer and Trademarks .............................................. 1-1 Chapter 1 Regulatory Information ......................................................................... 1-2 Video Standard Notice ........................................................................ 1-10 OpenSSL Toolkit License Issues ....................................................... 1-10 FreeType License Issues .................................................................... 1-13 ENERGY STAR Program .................................................................. 1-16 Disposing of the computer and the computer's battery .................. 1-16 General Precautions ........................................................................... 1-17 Safety Icons ......................................................................................... 1-20 Chapter 2 Getting Started Equipment checklist ............................................................................. 2-1 Conventions ........................................................................................... 2-1 Using your computer for the first time ................................................ 2-2 Getting to know Windows ..................................................................... 2-6 Turning off the power ............................................................................ 2-8 System Recovery ................................................................................ 2-12 Chapter 3 The Grand Tour Front with the display closed ............................................................... 3-1 Left side .................................................................................................. 3-1 Right side ............................................................................................... 3-3 Underside ............................................................................................... 3-4 Front with the display open .................................................................. 3-5 Internal Hardware Components ........................................................... 3-8 Power Condition Descriptions ............................................................. 3-9 Chapter 4 Operating Basics Using the Touch Pad ............................................................................. 4-1 The Keyboard ......................................................................................... 4-2 Using the Fingerprint Sensor ............................................................... 4-4 Battery .................................................................................................... 4-6 Memory media ..................................................................................... 4-10 HDMI out port ................................................................................... 4-13 LAN ....................................................................................................... 4-14 Wireless display .................................................................................. 4-15 Security lock ........................................................................................ 4-16 User's Manual ii Optional Accessories .......................................................................... 4-16 Sound System and Video mode ......................................................... 4-17 Chapter 5 Utilities and Advanced Usage Utilities and Applications ...................................................................... 5-1 Special features ..................................................................................... 5-3 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Problem-solving process ..................................................................... 6-1 Hardware and system checklist ........................................................... 6-4 Technical support ................................................................................ 6-12 Chapter 7 Appendix Specifications ........................................................................................ 7-1 AC Power Cord and Connectors .......................................................... 7-2 Information for Wireless Devices ........................................................ 7-3 Information about Intel Authenticate .............................................. 7-16 Accessibility ........................................................................................ 7-16 Ease of Access for Dynabook notebook ........................................... 7-17 Legal Footnotes ................................................................................... 7-20 Index User's Manual iii Chapter 1 Legal, Regulatory, and Safety This chapter states the legal, regulatory, and safety information applicable to your computer. Copyright, Disclaimer and Trademarks Copyright 2021 Dynabook Inc. All Rights Reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Dynabook Inc. No patent liability is assumed, with respect to the use of the information contained herein. First edition February 2021 Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject to civil damages or criminal action. Comply with copyright laws in making any reproduction from this manual. Disclaimer This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for your computer at the time of this manuals production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to change without notice. Dynabook Inc. assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or discrepancies between the computer and the manual. Any references in this Guide to Dynabook shall mean Dynabook Inc. and/or its affiliates. Trademarks Intel, Intel logo are trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. User's Manual 1-1 The Bluetooth word mark is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. USB Type-C and USB-C are trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. All other company names, product names, and service names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Regulatory Information The regulatory information herein might vary. Check the ID information on the bottom of the device or box for specific information applicable to the model you purchased. FCC information This device complies with FCC RF exposure requirements This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits can be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals not recommended by Dynabook is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external devices and the computers Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.2 Gen1) port, USB Type-
C port and HDMI out port. Changes or modifications made to this equipment, not expressly approved by Dynabook or parties authorized by Dynabook could void the users authority to operate the equipment. User's Manual 1-2 FCC conditions This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Contact Address:
Dynabook Americas, Inc. 5241 California Avenue, Suite 100 Irvine, California, USA, 92617 Telephone:
(949) 583-3000 This information is only applicable for the countries/regions where it is required. California Prop 65 Warning This product contains chemicals, including lead, known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. For the state of California only. Export Administration Regulation This document contains technical data that may be controlled under the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and may be subject to the approval of the U.S. Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the U.S. Export Administration Regulations is prohibited. FCC Part 15.21 information for user Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the authority to operate equipment. This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. User's Manual 1-3 EU Declaration of Conformity This product is carrying the CE-Mark in accordance with the related European Directives. Responsible for CE-Marking is Dynabook Europe GmbH, Stresemannallee 4b, 41460 Neuss, Germany. The complete and official EU Declaration of Conformity can be found on the web site http://emea.dynabook.com/product-conformity on the Internet. CE compliance Hereby, Dynabook Europe GmbH declares that the model(s) described in this manual is/are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://emea.dynabook.com/product-conformity. This product is labeled with the CE Mark in accordance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the applicable European Directives, notably Radio Equipment Directive (2014/53/EU), RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU, Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC (ErP) and the related implementing measures. This product and the original options are designed to observe the applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards. However, Dynabook cannot guarantee that this product still observes these EMC standards if options or cables not produced by Dynabook are connected or implemented. In this case the persons who have connected/implemented those options/cables have to provide assurance that the system (PC plus options/cables) still fulfils the required standards. To avoid in general EMC problems, the following guidance should be noted:
Only CE marked options should be connected/implemented Only best shielded cables should be connected Working environment This product was designed to fulfil the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) requirements to be observed for so-called Residential, commercial and light industry environments. Dynabook do not recommend the use of this product in working environments other than the above listed working environment. For example, the following environments are not verified:
Industrial Environments (e.g. environments where a mains voltage of 380 V three-phase is used) Medical Environments (according to Medical Device Directive) Automotive Environments Aircraft Environments User's Manual 1-4 Any consequences resulting from the use of this product in working environments that are not verified/recommended are not the responsibility of Dynabook. The consequences of the use of this product in non-verified working environments may be:
Interference with other devices or machines in the near surrounding area. Malfunction of, or data loss from, this product caused by disturbances generated by other devices or machines in the near surrounding area. Therefore Dynabook strongly recommend that the electromagnetic compatibility of this product should be suitably tested in all non-verified working environments before use. In the case of vehicles or aircraft, the manufacturer or airline operator respectively should be asked for permission before use of this product. Furthermore, for general safety reasons, the use of this product in environments with explosive atmospheres is not permitted. VCCI Class B Information (Japan Only) Canadian regulatory information (Canada only) This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications. Note that Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) regulations provide, that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dynabook could void your authority to operate this equipment. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Canadian Notice This device complies with ISED (formerly Industry Canada) license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. User's Manual 1-5 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. To comply with the Canadian RF exposure compliance requirements, this device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. When operating this computer, minimum distance of 13 mm from the antenna must be maintained. Pour tre conforme aux exigences canadiennes en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio, l'appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs au mme endroit qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur ni fonctionner en mme temps. Une distance minimale de 13 mm de l'antenne doit tre maintenue durant l'utilisation de cet ordinateur. This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux. Veuillez noter que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. The above caution applies to products that operate with an 802.11a radio device. La mise en garde ci-dessus ne sapplique quaux appareils ayant un transmetteur oprant en mode 802.11 a. User's Manual 1-6 Following information is only valid for EU-member States:
Information requirements Regulation EC 1275/2008 Additional information as required by Regulation (EC) 1275/2008 amended by Regulation (EU) 801/2013 implementing European Eco-Design Directive with regard to requirements for standby, off mode and networked standby electric power consumption of electrical and electronic household and office equipment can be found here: http://emea.dynabook.com/environment. Disposal of products The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that products must be collected and disposed of separately from household waste. Integrated batteries and accumulators can be disposed of with the product. They will be separated at the recycling centres. The black bar indicates that the product was placed on the market after August 13, 2005. By participating in the separate collection of products and batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. For more detailed information about the collection and recycling programmes available in your country, please visit our website http://emea.dynabook.com/environment or contact your local council office or the retail outlet where you purchased the product. User's Manual 1-7 Disposal of batteries and/or accumulators The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that batteries and/or accumulators must be collected and disposed of separately from household waste. If the battery or accumulator contains more than the specified values of lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and/or cadmium (Cd) defined in the European Battery Directive, then the chemical symbols for lead (Pb), mercury (Hg) and/or cadmium (Cd) will appear below the crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol. By participating in the separate collection of batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. To achieve this you should take any battery and/or accumulator to your local recycling site, or to a retail outlet or facility that offers to collect these devices for environmentally friendly disposal, ensuring that the terminal contacts are covered by non-conductive tape. For more detailed information about the collection and recycling programmes available in your country, please visit our website http://emea.dynabook.com/environment or contact your local council office or the retail outlet where you purchased the product. These symbols might not stick depending on the country and region where you purchased. REACH - Compliance Statement The European Union (EU) chemical regulation, REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals), entered into force on 1 June 2007, with phased deadlines to 2018. Dynabook will meet all REACH requirements and is committed to provide our customers with information about the presence in our articles of substances included on the candidate list according to REACH regulation. Please consult the following website http://emea.dynabook.com/environment for information about the presence in our articles of substances included on the candidate list according to REACH in a concentration above 0.1 % weight by weight. User's Manual 1-8 Following information is only for Turkey:
Disposal of products:
The crossed wheelie bin symbol means that this product should not be collected and disposed with other household wastes. When product become waste at the end-of-life, to protect environment and human health, it should be given to nearest collection recycling or disposal center. For more information about collection and recycling programs in your country please contact your local authority or the retailer where the product was purchased. Dynabook meets all requirements of Turkish regulation 28300 Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Dynabook 28300 sayl Trkiye ''Elektrikle alan ve elektronik ekipmanda belirli tehlikeli maddelerin kullanmyla ilgili kstlama ynetmelii gereklerini tamamen yerine getirmektedir. The number of possible pixel failures of your display is defined according to ISO 9241-307 standards. If the number of pixel failures is less than this standard, they will not be counted as defect or failure. Battery is a consumption product, since the battery time depends on the usage of your computer. If the battery can not be charged at all, then it is a defect or failure. The changes in battery time is not a defect or failure. These symbols might not stick depending on the country and region where you purchased. Following information is only for India:
The use of this symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please visit our website https://asia.dynabook.com or contact call center
(1800-200-6768). User's Manual 1-9 These symbols might not stick depending on the country and region where you purchased. Video Standard Notice OpenSSL Toolkit License Issues THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC, THE VC-1 AND MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (I) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE STANDARDS ("VIDEO") AND/OR (II) DECODING AVC, VC-1 AND MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE SUCH VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com. LICENSE ISSUES
OpenSSL License
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org
Copyright (c) 1998-2019 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit."
[http://www.openssl.org]
User's Manual 1-10 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit"
[http://www.openssl.org]
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
All rights reserved.
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). User's Manual 1-11 Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)"
4. The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
User's Manual 1-12 FreeType License Issues The FreeType Project LICENSE
2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text:
Portions of this software are copyright (C) <year> The FreeType Project
www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. Legal Terms Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use. User's Manual 1-13
0. Definitions
Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the
`FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as
`a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty
2. Redistribution
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions:
Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. User's Manual 1-14 Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. 3. Advertising
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or
`FreeType Distribution'. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license. 4. Contacts
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
freetype@nongnu.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. freetype-devel@nongnu.org Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org User's Manual 1-15 ENERGY STAR Program Your Computer model may be ENERGY STAR compliant. If the model you purchased is compliant, it will be listed on the following website: https://
www.energystar.gov/productfinder/product/certified-
computers . Dynabook is a partner in the ENERGY STAR Program and has designed this computer to meet the latest ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Your computer ships with the power management options preset to a configuration that will provide the most stable operating environment and optimum system performance for both AC power and battery modes. To conserve energy, your computer is set to enter the low-
power Sleep Mode which shuts down the system and display within 15 minutes of inactivity in AC power mode. Dynabook recommends that you leave this and other energy saving features active, so that your computer will operate at its maximum energy efficiency. You can wake the computer from Sleep Mode by pressing the power button. Your ENERGY STAR certified computer should be set by default to enter a low-power "sleep mode" after a period of inactivity. Simply touching the mouse or keyboard "wakes"
the computer in seconds. These sleep features can save you up to $23 per year (200 kWh per year in electricity) and prevent up to 300 pounds of greenhouse gas emissions annually. To learn how to adjust or activate these sleep settings on your computer, please go to:
www.energystar.gov/sleepinstructions To activate sleep settings organization-wide quickly and easily through network tools, please go to:
www.energystar.gov/powermanagement Disposing of the computer and the computer's battery The computer's battery pack is not user-accessible. Contact an authorized service provider for details regarding how to dispose of the computer and the battery pack. Dynabook is strongly committed to reducing electronic waste. For the efficient use of resources and appropriate treatment of hazardous substances, local, state and federal regulations must be adhered to when User's Manual 1-16 recycling your electronic device. To learn about Dynabooks sustainability commitment, visit:
http://emea.dynabook.com/environment General Precautions Your computer is designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the computer. Be certain to read the following general precautions and to note the cautions included in the text of the manual. Provide adequate ventilation Always make sure that your computer and AC adaptor have adequate ventilation and are protected from overheating when the power is turned on or when an AC adaptor is connected to a power outlet (even if your computer is in Sleep Mode). In this condition, observe the following:
Never cover your computer or AC adaptor with any object. Never place your computer or AC adaptor near a heat source, such as an electric blanket or heater. Never cover or block the air vents including those at the base of the computer. Always operate your computer on a hard flat surface. Using your computer on a carpet or other soft material can block the vents. Always provide sufficient space around the computer. Overheating your computer or AC adaptor could cause system failure, computer or AC adaptor damage or a fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Creating a computer-friendly environment Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer and any other items you are using, such as a printer. Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they might overheat. To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area from:
Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight. Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the computer) or speakerphones. Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature change such as air conditioner vents or heaters. Extreme heat, cold, or humidity. User's Manual 1-17 Liquids and corrosive chemicals. Stress injury Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. It also includes information on work space design, posture, and lighting that can help reduce physical stress. Heat injury Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your skin might suffer a low-heat injury. If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can become hot. The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use, but this condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the AC adaptor, disconnect it and let it cool before moving it. Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the material could become damaged. Pressure or impact damage Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise cause it to malfunction. Cleaning the computer To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it. Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely. In these circumstances, you should get the computer inspected by an authorized service provider in order to assess the scope of any damage. Clean the plastics of the computer using a cloth slightly dampened with water. You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with the cloth. User's Manual 1-18 Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the computer. Moving the computer While the computer is designed for flexible day-to-day usage, you should exercise a few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure trouble-free operation. Make sure all disk/disc activity has ended before moving the computer. Turn off (shut down) the computer. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the computer. Close the display panel. Do not pick up the computer by its display panel. Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC adaptor and allow it to cool down. A failure to follow this instruction might result in minor heat injury. Do not expose the computer to rapid temperature changes (for example, in a situation where you carry the computer from a cold environment to a warm room). Do not turn on the power until condensation disappears. Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock. A failure to follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer failure, or loss of data. Never transport your computer with any cards inserted. This might damage either the computer and/or the card resulting in computer failure. Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer. When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does not fall or hit anything. Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements. Mobile phones Be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30 cm is maintained between the computer and a mobile phone that is in use. Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be sure to read it before using the computer. User's Manual 1-19 Safety Icons Safety icons are used in this manual to bring important information to your attention. Each type of message is identified as follows. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or serious injury, if you do not follow instructions. A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or failure to follow instructions might cause data loss, equipment damage, or might result in minor or moderate injury. Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of your equipment. User's Manual 1-20 Chapter 2 Getting Started This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and basic information to start using your computer. If you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by Dynabook, some of the features described in this manual might not function properly. You might not have all the software mentioned in this manual depending on the model you purchased. Equipment checklist Carefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and packaging materials for future use. Hardware Check to make sure that you have all the following items:
Portable Personal Computer AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug) Documentation Quickstart Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort Warranty Information If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer immediately. Conventions This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and operating procedures. Click Right-click Tap the Touch Pad or click the left Touch Pad control button once. Left-click the mouse once. Click the right Touch Pad control button once. Right-click the mouse once. User's Manual 2-1 Double-click Start Tap the Touch Pad or click the left Touch Pad control button twice. Left-click the mouse twice. The word "Start" refers to the "
lower-left corner of the screen.
" button in the Using your computer for the first time Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is intended to help you be more comfortable and productive while using a notebook computer. By following the recommendations in it, you can reduce your chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your hand, arms, shoulders, or neck. This section provides basic information to start using your computer. It covers the following topics:
Connecting the AC adaptor Opening the display Turning on the power Initial setup Getting to know Windows Use a virus-check program and make sure that it is updated regularly. Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting destroys all stored data. It is a good idea to back up the internal Solid-State Drive or other main storage device to external media periodically. General storage media is not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain conditions might result in data loss. Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to the internal Solid-State Drive or other storage media. Failure to do so might result in data loss. Connecting the AC adaptor Attach the AC adaptor when you want to charge the battery or operate from AC power. The battery pack must be charged before you can operate from battery power. The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100 volts to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 hertz or 60 hertz, enabling you to use this computer in almost any country/region. The adaptor converts AC power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer. User's Manual 2-2 Always use the AC adaptor that was included with your computer, or use AC adaptors specified by Dynabook to avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor might cause fire or damage to the computer, possibly resulting in serious injury. Dynabook assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an incompatible adaptor. Never plug the AC adaptor into a power source that does not correspond to both the voltage range and the frequency specified on the regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so might result in a fire or electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury. Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country of use. Failure to do so might result in a fire or electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury. The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in the region the computer is bought and should not be used outside this region. For use in other regions, buy power cords that conform to safety rules and regulations in the particular region. Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug. When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the steps in the exact order as described in this Users Manual. As a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts. Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface, furniture, or any other surface that might be marred by exposure to heat since the computer base and the surface of the AC adaptor increase in temperature during normal use. Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface that is resistant to heat damage. Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for detailed precautions and handling instructions. 1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor. Figure 2-1 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug) User's Manual 2-3 Figure 2-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug) Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord is included with the computer depending on the model. 2. Connect the DC output plug of the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack on your computer. Figure 2-3 Connecting the DC output plug to the computer 1. DC IN 19V jack 2. DC output plug Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. 3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet. The DC IN/Battery indicator glows. Opening the display The display panel can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal viewing. To open the display panel, slowly lift it with one hand holding the center of the display panel (as shown in the following figure) and the other hand holding the palm rest down so that the main body of the computer is not raised. This will allow the angle of the display panel to be adjusted to provide optimum clarity. User's Manual 2-4 12 Figure 2-4 Opening the display panel 1. Display panel Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. Open and close the display panel with reasonable care. Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut might damage the computer. Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this might put stress on the display panels hinges and cause damage. Do not lift the computer by the display panel. Do not close the computer with pens or any other objects left in between the display panel and the keyboard. When opening or closing the display panel, place one hand on the palm rest to hold the computer in place and use the other hand to slowly open or close the display panel (Do not use excessive force when opening or closing the display panel). Do not press or push with excessive force on the display screen, otherwise the computer might become unsteady and possibly fall over. Turning on the power This section describes how to turn on the power. The Power indicator indicates the status. Refer to the Power Condition Descriptions section for more information. After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you have set up the operating system. User's Manual 2-5 1 Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup. Do not touch the display screen while turning on the computer. 1. Open the display panel. 2. Press the power button. Figure 2-5 Turning on the power 1. Power button Initial setup Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. The Windows Startup Screen is the first screen displayed when you turn on the power. To install the operating system properly, follow the on-screen instructions on each screen. When it is displayed, be sure to read the license terms and license agreement carefully. Getting to know Windows For detailed information on what is new and how to operate Windows, refer to Tips in the Start menu. Start menu The Start menu is the launching pad for everything you can do in the Windows operating system, providing easy ways to access your apps, programs, websites and other important information. You can access the Start menu from an app or the desktop in the following ways:
Click the Start button (
Press the Windows logo key (
) on your keyboard.
) in the lower-left corner of the screen. You can pin your favorite apps to the Start menu as tiles in grid-like pattern, and also group them. Tiles show you dynamic information from apps without having to open them. User's Manual 2-6 1 Windows taskbar Task view By default, the bottom of the desktop is Windows taskbar. You can see all of your currently running apps on the Windows taskbar.
) is launched from the Windows taskbar at the bottom of the Task view (
screen. Task view allows you to view the apps that are currently running. Also, you can create custom desktops so that running apps can be grouped for entertainment, productivity, or what you just want. To do this, click the Task view icon the apps you want to use on that desktop. To switch between desktops, click Task view again.
, and then click New desktop. Open Search Search on the Windows taskbar allows you to find apps, files, settings, and more on the computer. When Internet connection is available, it also shows you the best search result from the Internet. The personal assistant called Cortana may be available, depending on your country/region. You can ask questions or talk to Cortana in your natural voice, and Cortana answers your questions using information from the Internet. To talk with Cortana, an internal or external microphone is required. Action Center Settings You can review important notifications from apps or Windows in Action Center, and take action without having to open apps. It also provides quick action buttons to access to most-used settings instantly. Select the Action on the Windows taskbar to view your notifications and quick Center icon actions. Settings provides system settings including advanced settings in the Control Panel. They are divided in categories so that you can configure, optimize, or personalize Windows. You can also type in the keyword, and use Search to find any setting. To open Settings, click Start ->
(Settings). You can pin it to the Start menu as a tile by right-clicking on Settings and selecting Pin to Start. Windows Store Although many apps are pre-installed in your computer, you can also download many others from the Windows Store. User's Manual 2-7 You can search for and browse thousands of apps, all grouped into easy-
to-find categories there. Windows Hello Windows Hello is a more personal and secure way to sign in to your Windows system, apps, and services using fingerprint or a PIN. To set up Windows Hello, click Start ->
in options.
(Settings) -> Accounts -> Sign-
Under Sign-in options, you will see options for Fingerprint if your computer has fingerprint sensor that supports it. Once you have set up, you will be able to sign in with a quick touch. You might need to add a PIN under Windows Hello PIN before you can set up Windows Hello Fingerprint. Sign-in options
), Fingerprint (
Windows offers a number of sign-in options including Password (
), and Picture password (
from unauthorized access. If you have multiple sign-in methods set for a user account, you can select an option on the Windows login screen by clicking sign-in options.
), PIN
) authentication to prevent Turning off the power The power can be turned off in one of the following modes, either Shut Down Mode, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode. Shut Down Mode When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode, no data will be saved and the computer will boot to the main screen of the operating system the next time it is turned on. 1. If you have entered data, either save it to the internal storage drive or to other storage media. 2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the disk/
disc. If you turn off the power while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you might lose data or damage the disk. Never turn off the power while an application is running. Failure to do so can cause data loss. Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device, or remove storage media during data read/write. Failure to do so can cause data loss. 3. Click Start ->
4.
(Power) and then select Shut down. Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer. User's Manual 2-8 Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately. Wait a short period to avoid any potential damage. Restarting the computer Certain conditions require that you restart the computer, for example if you change certain computer settings. To restart the computer, there are several ways this can be achieved:
Click Start ->
(Power) and then select Restart. Press CTRL, ALT, and DEL simultaneously (once) to display the menu window, and then select Restart by clicking the power icon (
in the lower-right corner.
) Before restarting the computer, be sure to save your data. Sleep Mode If you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this mode, data is maintained in the main memory of the computer. When you turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off. When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always shut down the computer. This includes turning off any wireless communication functionalities, and canceling settings that reactivate the computer automatically, such as a timer recording function. Failure to shut down the computer in this way might allow the operating system to reactivate and run pre-programmed tasks or preserve unsaved data, which might interfere with aviation or other systems, possibly causing serious injury. Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data. To prevent data loss, do not switch to Sleep Mode while transferring data to external media, such as USB devices, memory media, or other external memory devices. When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Sleep Mode according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options.) To restore the operation of the computer from Sleep Mode, press and hold the power button for a short amount of time. User's Manual 2-9 If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is active, the application might not be restored when the computer is next turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode. To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode, disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options. To use the Hybrid Sleep function, configure it in the Power Options. Benefits of Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:
Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than the Hibernation Mode feature. Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System Sleep Mode feature. Allows the use of the panel power off feature. Executing Sleep Mode You can enter Sleep Mode in one of following ways:
(Power) and then select Sleep. Click Start ->
Close the display panel. Note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options. Press the power button. Note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options. When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left off when you shut down the computer. When the computer is in Sleep Mode, the Power indicator blinks blue. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen the overall operating time by turning it off into Hibernation Mode. Sleep Mode consumes more power while the computer is off. Sleep Mode limitations Sleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:
Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down. Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise. Hibernation Mode The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the internal storage drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is turned on, the previous state is restored. Note that the Hibernation Mode User's Manual 2-10 feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the computer. Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves the contents of memory to the internal storage drive. However, for safety sake, it is best to save your data manually. Data will be lost if you disconnect the AC adaptor before saving is completed. To prevent data loss, do not switch to Hibernation Mode while transferring data to external media, such as USB devices, memory media, or other external memory devices. Benefits of Hibernation Mode The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:
Saves data to the internal storage drive when the computer automatically shuts down because of a low battery condition. You can return to your previous working environment immediately when you turn on the computer. Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System Hibernate feature. Allows the use of the panel power off feature. Starting Hibernation Mode To enter Hibernation Mode, click Start ->
Hibernate.
(Power) and then select To show Hibernate in Power menu, set up according to the following steps:
1. Click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options. 2. Click Choose what the power buttons do or Choose what closing the lid does. 3. Click Change settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Select the Hibernate check box from Shutdown settings. 5. Click the Save changes button. Automatic Hibernation Mode The computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically when you press the power button or close the display panel. To define these settings, do the following:
1. Click Power Options and then click Choose what the power buttons do or Choose what closing the lid does. User's Manual 2-11 2. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the power button and When I close the lid. 3. Click the Save changes button. Data saving in Hibernation Mode When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer takes a moment to save the current data in memory to the internal storage drive. After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved to the internal storage drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices. Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment to let all capacitors fully discharge. System Recovery There is a hidden partition allocated on the internal storage drive for the System Recovery Options in the event of a problem. You can also create recovery media and restore the system. The following items are described in this section:
Creating Recovery Media Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Media Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery Partition If you choose dynabook Maintenance Utility to erase the internal storage drive, all data including the operating system and recovery partition will be deleted. In that case, you cannot create recovery media or restore the pre-
installed software from the recovery partition. Make sure that you have already created recovery media before you start dynabook Maintenance Utility. This recovery media can be used to restore your system after you have erased your internal storage drive. Creating Recovery Media This section describes how to create Recovery Media. Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Media. Be sure to close all other software programs. Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy load on the CPU. Operate the computer at full power. Do not use power-saving features. User's Manual 2-12 Do not write to the media when the virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any software that checks files automatically in the background. Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance internal storage drive access speed. They might cause unstable operation and damage data. Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting the media. Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars. Do not use on an unstable surface such as a stand. A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the internal storage drive, and can be copied to either disc media or USB Flash Memory by using the following steps:
1. Select either blank disc or USB Flash Memory. The application allows you to choose from a variety of different media onto which the recovery image can be copied including disc media and USB Flash Memory. Some of the disc media might not be compatible with the optical disc drive connected to your computer. You should therefore verify that the optical disc drive supports the blank media you have chosen before proceeding. USB Flash Memory will be formatted and all the data in the USB Flash Memory will be lost when proceeding. 2. 3. Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows operating system from the internal storage drive as normal. Insert the first blank disc into the external optical disc drive tray, or insert the USB Flash Memory into one available USB port. 4. Click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> System and Security -> Security and Maintenance -> Recovery -> Create a recovery drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish creating the Recovery Media. 5. Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Media If the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to use the Recovery Media you have created to restore the computer to the state it was in when you originally received it. To perform this restoration, do the following:
Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected during the restoring process. User's Manual 2-13 Do not close the display panel during the restoring process. When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the internal storage drive will be reformatted and all data will be lost. If your model has fingerprint function, before you reinstall the Windows operating system, delete the registered fingerprints. Otherwise, the same fingerprints cannot be registered after the reinstallation. 1. Load the Recovery Media into the external optical disc drive or insert the recovery USB Flash Memory into one available USB port. 2. Click Start ->
3. Hold down the F10 key and then release this key just after the
(Power) and then select Restart. computer is powered on. 4. Use the up and down cursor key to select the appropriate option from the menu according to your actual recovery media. 5. A menu is displayed from which you should follow the on-screen instructions. If you have previously chosen to remove the recovery partition without creating Recovery Media, the Recovery Media cannot be created. However, if you have already created a Recovery Media, you can use it to restore the recovery partition. If you have not created Recovery Media, contact Technical support for assistance. Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery Partition A portion of the total internal storage drive space is configured as a hidden recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore pre-installed software in the event of a problem. If you set up your internal storage drive again later, do not change, delete, or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual, otherwise you might find that space for the required software is not available. In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the partitions on your internal storage drive, you might find that it becomes impossible to set up your computer. Make sure that the AC adaptor is connected during the restoring process. Do not close the display panel during the restoring process. User's Manual 2-14 When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the internal storage drive will be reformatted and all data will be lost. If your model has fingerprint function, before you reinstall the Windows operating system, delete the registered fingerprints. Otherwise, the same fingerprints cannot be registered after the reinstallation. 1. Click Start ->
2. Hold down 0 (zero) key and then release this key just after the
(Power) and then select Restart. computer is powered on. 3. Select Troubleshoot -> dynabook Maintenance Utility ->
dynabook Recovery Wizard. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the recovery. 4. User's Manual 2-15 Chapter 3 The Grand Tour This chapter identifies the various components of the computer. It is recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the computer. Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons) For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Handle your computer carefully to avoid scratching or damaging the surface. Front with the display closed The following figure shows the front of the computer with the display panel in the closed position. Figure 3-1 Front of the computer with display panel closed Left side The following figure shows the left side of the computer. Figure 3-2 The left side of the computer 1. DC IN/Battery indicator 2. DC IN 19V jack 3. HDMI out port 4. Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.2 Gen1) port 5. USB Type-C (USB 3.2 Gen1) port Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. User's Manual 3-1 14523 DC IN/Battery indicator DC IN 19V jack The DC IN/Battery indicator shows the condition of the DC IN and the battery charge status. Blue indicates that the battery is fully charged while the power is being correctly supplied from the AC power adaptor. Refer to the Power Condition Descriptions section for more information on this feature. The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to power the computer and charge its internal batteries. Note that you must use the AC adaptor that was included with your computer, or use AC adaptors specified by Dynabook. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor might cause fire or damage to the computer, possibly resulting in serious injury. HDMI out port HDMI out port can connect with Type A connector HDMI cable. Universal Serial Bus
(USB 3.2 Gen1) port USB Type-C (USB 3.2 Gen1) port One type-A Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to the USB 3.2 standard, is provided on the left side of the computer. USB 3.2 port is compliant with USB 3.2 standard and backward compatible with USB 2.0 devices. One USB Type-C port, which complies to the USB 3.2 Gen1 standard, is provided on the left side of the computer. This USB Type-C port supports USB 3.2 Gen1
(DC5V, 2A) with theoretical maximum transmission rate at 5Gbps. This port supports USB data transmission, Video output (audio stream can be included) and USB Power Delivery. Note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of all USB devices that are available. Some functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly. Before removing a USB device from the USB port or USB Type-C port of your computer, click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon on the Windows Taskbar, and then select the USB device that you want to remove. User's Manual 3-2 Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples, and paper clips, out of the USB port or the USB Type-C port. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Right side The following figure shows the right side of the computer. Figure 3-3 The right side of the computer 1. Memory media slot 2. Headphone/Microphone jack 3. Universal Serial Bus (USB 3.2 Gen1) port 4. LAN jack 5. Security lock slot Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. Memory media slot This slot lets you insert a micro SD/SDHC/
SDXC memory card. Refer to the Memory media section for more information. Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples, and paper clips, out of the Memory media slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Headphone/
Microphone jack A 3.5 mm mini headphone/microphone jack enables connection of a monaural microphone, stereo headphones, or a headset. Universal Serial Bus
(USB 3.2 Gen1) port One type-A Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to the USB 3.2 standard, is provided on the right side of the computer. USB 3.2 port is compliant with USB 3.2 standard and backward compatible with USB 2.0 devices. Note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of all USB devices that are available. Some functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly. User's Manual 3-3 45213 Before removing a USB device from the USB port of your computer, click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon on the Windows Taskbar, and then select the USB device that you want to remove. Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples, and paper clips, out of the USB port. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. LAN jack This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) or Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T). Refer to Operating Basics, for details. Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It might cause damage or malfunction. Security lock slot A security cable can be attached to this slot and then connected to a desk or other large object in order to deter theft of the computer. Underside The following figure shows the underside of the computer. Ensure that the display is closed before the computer is turned over to avoid causing any damage. Figure 3-4 The underside of the computer 1. Cooling vents 2. Stereo speakers Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. Cooling vents The cooling vents help the processor to avoid overheating. User's Manual 3-4 221 Do not block the cooling vents. Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples, and paper clips, out of the cooling vents. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. Carefully clean the dust on the surface of the cooling vents using a soft cloth. Stereo speakers The speakers emit sound generated by your software as well as audio alarms, such as low battery condition, generated by the system. Front with the display open This section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to open the display, lift up the display panel and position it at a comfortable viewing angle for you. User's Manual 3-5 Figure 3-5 The front of the computer with the display panel open 1. Web Camera 2. Web Camera LED 3. Microphones 4. Display screen 5. NUM LOCK indicator 6. CAPS LOCK indicator 7. Power indicator 8. Wireless communication antennas
(not shown) 9. Display hinge 10. Power button 11. Keyboard 12. Touch Pad 13. Touch Pad control buttons 14. Fingerprint Sensor*
* Provided with some models. Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. Web Camera Web Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video conferences using a communication tool. Web Camera LED The Web Camera LED glows when the Web Camera is operating. Do not point the web camera directly at the sun. User's Manual 3-6 4123765111210139814412376111210139814 Do not touch or press strongly on the web camera lens and LED. Failure to do so might reduce image quality, possibly resulting in recognizing faces incorrectly. Use an eyeglass cleaner (cleaner cloth) or other soft cloth to clean the lens and the LED if it becomes dirty. While web camera is capturing your face, make sure that your face is in front of the web camera and you look directly at it. Microphones Display screen The built-in microphones allow you to record sounds for your application. Refer to the Sound System and Video mode section for more information. 39.6 cm (15.6") or 35.6 cm (14") LCD screen, is configured with one of the following resolutions depending on the model you purchased:
HD, 1366 horizontal x 768 vertical pixels FHD, 1920 horizontal x 1080 vertical pixels Be aware that, when the computer is operating on the AC adaptor, the image displayed on the internal screen is somewhat brighter than when it operates on battery power. This difference in brightness levels is intended to save power when operating on battery. Legal Footnote (LCD) For more information regarding LCD, refer to the Legal Footnotes section. NUM LOCK indicator When the NUM LOCK indicator glows, you can use the number keys on the keyboard for number entry. CAPS LOCK indicator This indicator glows blue when letter keys are locked into their uppercase format. Power indicator The Power indicator normally glows blue when the computer is turned on. Wireless communication antennas The following antennas are built-in:
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth Do not cover the wireless communication antennas area with any metal objects, otherwise the wireless function might not work. User's Manual 3-7 Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN) For more information regarding Wireless LAN, refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Display hinge The display hinge allows the display panel to be positioned at a variety of easy-to-view angles. Power button Press this button to turn the computer's power on or off. Keyboard Touch Pad Touch Pad control buttons Fingerprint Sensor The keyboard contains character keys, control keys, function keys, and special Windows keys, providing all the functionality of a full-size keyboard. Refer to the The Keyboard section for details. The Touch Pad located in the palm rest is used to control the movement of the mouse pointer. To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the direction you want the mouse pointer to go. The two buttons located on the bottom of the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a standard mouse. Press the left button to select a menu item or to manipulate text or graphics designated by the mouse pointer, and press the right button to display a menu or other function depending on the software you are using. This sensor enables you to enroll and sign in with a fingerprint in Windows Hello. For more information, refer to the on-screen instructions in Windows Hello. Some models are equipped with a Fingerprint Sensor. Internal Hardware Components This section describes the internal hardware components of your computer. The actual specifications might vary depending on the model you purchased. CPU The processor type varies depending on model. To check which type of processor is included in your model, click Start -> dynabook Support Utility -> System Information. User's Manual 3-8 Legal Footnote (CPU) For more information regarding CPU, refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Internal Storage Drive The capacity of the internal storage drive varies depending on the model. Note that part of the internal storage drive overall capacity is reserved as administration space. Your computer is equipped with a "Solid-State Drive (SSD)". In this manual, the word "internal storage drive" refers to SSD unless otherwise stated. SSD is a large-capacity storage device which uses Solid-State Memory in place of a magnetic disk of the hard disk. Under certain unusual conditions of prolonged non-use and/or exposure to high temperatures, the SSD might be vulnerable to data retention errors. Legal Footnote (Internal Storage Drive Capacity) For more information regarding Internal Storage Drive Capacity, refer to the Legal Footnotes section. Power Condition Descriptions The computer operating capability and battery charge status are affected by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is connected and what the battery charge level is. DC IN/Battery indicator Check the DC IN/Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery pack and the power status with the AC adaptor connected. The following indicator conditions should be noted:
Flashing Amber The battery charge might be low. Connect the AC adaptor to recharge the battery. If it still flashes amber, it indicates a problem with the computer. Disconnect the AC adaptor for several seconds, and then reconnect it. After that, press the power button. If it still does not operate properly, you should contact your reseller or dealer. Indicates that the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is charging. Amber User's Manual 3-9 Blue No light Indicates that the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is fully charged. Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light. If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge stops and the DC IN/Battery indicator goes out. When the temperature of the battery pack falls to a normal range, charging will resume. This process occurs regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off. Power indicator Check the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer. The following indicator conditions should be noted:
Blue Indicates that the computer is turned on. Flashing Blue No light Indicates that the computer is in Sleep Mode and that there is sufficient power available (AC adaptor or battery) to maintain this condition. Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light. User's Manual 3-10 Chapter 4 Operating Basics This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer, and highlights the precautions that must be taken when using it. Using the Touch Pad The Touch Pad on the palm rest might support the following gestures:
Tap Tap once on the Touch Pad to activate an item, such as an app. Two-Finger Tap Pinch or stretch Two-Finger Scroll Tap once on the Touch Pad with two fingers together to display a menu or other function depending on the software you are using.
(Similar to right-click) Place two fingers down on the Touch Pad and move them toward each other (pinch) or away from each other (stretch). This shows different levels of information or visually zooms in or out. Place two fingers down and slide them vertically or horizontally from anywhere on the Touch Pad. This allows you to operate the scroll bars of a window. Three-Finger Tap Tap once on the Touch Pad with three fingers together to launch Windows Search. User's Manual 4-1 Three-Finger Scroll Place three fingers down and slide them vertically or horizontally from anywhere on the Touch Pad. Slide towards left/right: switches between your open apps. Slide your fingers slowly across the Touch Pad to flip through them all. Slide up: views all your open apps in task view. Slide down: shows the desktop. Four-Finger Tap Tap once on the Touch Pad with four fingers together to open the Action Center. Four-Finger Scroll Place four fingers down and slide them vertically or horizontally from anywhere on the Touch Pad. Slide towards left/right: switches between virtual desktops. Slide up: views all your open apps in task view. Slide down: shows the desktop. Do not put items on the Touch Pad surface to prevent abnormal action. Some of the Touch Pad operations described in this section are only supported in certain applications. The Keyboard The number of keys available on your keyboard depends on which country/
region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being available for numerous languages. There are different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys, function keys, and Windows special keys. Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Failure to do so might damage the parts under the key caps. Keyboard indicators The following figure shows the position of the CAPS LOCK indicator and the NUM LOCK indicator. User's Manual 4-2 When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard produces capitals when any letter is typed. When the NUM LOCK indicator glows, the ten key allows you to enter numbers. Figure 4-1 Keyboard indicators 1. CAPS LOCK indicator 2. NUM LOCK indicator Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. CAPS LOCK NUM LOCK This indicator glows blue when letter keys are locked into their uppercase format. When the NUM LOCK indicator glows, you can use the number keys on the keyboard for number entry. Function Keys The function keys (F1 ~ F12) are the 12 keys at the top of your keyboard. You can configure the function keys mode as "Special function mode" or
"Standard F1-F12 mode" in the BIOS setup utility. "Special function mode"
allows you to use special functions without pressing the FN key. Refer to BIOS setup utility to enter the BIOS setup utility. Special function mode Standard F1-
F12 mode Function F1 FN + F1 Switches the system to Sleep Mode. User's Manual 4-3 121 Special function mode Standard F1-
F12 mode Function F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F10 F11 FN + F2 FN + F3 FN + F4 FN + F5 FN + F6 FN + F7 FN + F8 Decreases the brightness of the display panel in individual steps. Increases the brightness of the display panel in individual steps. Turns the display backlight on or off. Enables or disables the Touch Pad. Turns the sound on or off. Decreases the playback volume of the computer. Increases the playback volume of the computer. FN + F10 Takes a screenshot. FN + F11 Changes the active display device. To use a simultaneous mode, you must set the resolution of the internal display panel to match the resolution of the external display device. F12 FN + F12 Turns the Airplane mode on or off. Some functions show the toast notification at the edges of the screen. Windows special key The keyboard provides the key that has special functions in Windows. This Windows logo key activates the Windows Start menu. Using the Fingerprint Sensor Some models are equipped with the fingerprint sensor for the purpose of enrolling and recognizing fingerprints. Lightly touch and rest your finger on the fingerprint sensor to recognize fingerprints. During enrollment, you might need to touch and lift your finger on the sensor repeatedly until setup is complete. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the setup. By enrolling the ID and password onto the fingerprint authentication feature, it is no longer necessary to input the password from the keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:
User's Manual 4-4 Sign-in to Windows Unlock the password-protected screen-saver. Figure 4-2 Using the Fingerprint Sensor 1. Fingerprint sensor Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint function. Total fingerprints which can be registered are 10 pcs. Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor Be aware of the following considerations when using the fingerprint sensor. A failure to follow these guidelines might result in damage to the sensor, sensor failure, fingerprint recognition problems or a lower fingerprint recognition success rate. Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp objects. Do not press the sensor strongly. Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects. Keep the sensor surface dry and free from water vapor. Do not touch the sensor with a soiled or dirty finger as minute foreign particles of dust and dirt might scratch it. Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor. Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any other object which might have a build-up of static electricity on it. Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition. Wash and dry your hands thoroughly. Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures, especially when the weather is dry. Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth. Do not use detergent or any other chemicals to clean the sensor. User's Manual 4-5 11 Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as they might result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the fingerprint recognition success rate:
Soaked or swollen finger, for example as might occur after taking a bath Injured finger Wet finger Soiled or oily finger Extremely dry skin condition on finger Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate:
Enroll two or more fingers. Enroll additional fingers if a recognition failure often occurs when using already enrolled fingers. Check the condition of your finger. Any conditions which have changed since enrollment, such as injury, rough skin, and extremely dry, wet, soiled, dirty, oily, soaked or swollen fingers, might lower the recognition success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the finger becomes thinner or fatter, the recognition success rate might be lowered. As the fingerprint for each finger is different and unique, you should ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are used for identification. The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there might be instances where certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient unique characteristics in their fingerprints. The recognition success rate might differ from user to user. This section explains battery types, use, recharging methods and handling. Battery Battery pack When the AC adaptor is not connected, the main power source of the computer is a lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as the main battery. Real-Time Clock (RTC) function The Real-Time Clock (RTC) function is supported. The main battery provides power for the internal real-time clock and calendar function and also maintains the system configuration while the computer is turned off. If the RTC lasting time completely runs out, the system will lose this information and the real-time clock and calendar will stop working. You can change the Real-Time Clock settings in the BIOS setup utility. Refer to Real-Time Clock for further information. User's Manual 4-6 Care and use of the battery pack This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle your battery pack properly. Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for detailed precautions and handling instructions. Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature from 5 through 35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak, battery pack performance might deteriorate, and the battery life might be shortened. Charging the battery When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the DC IN/Battery indicator flashes amber to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If you continue to use the computer while the DC IN/Battery indicator flashes, the computer enters Hibernation Mode so that you do not lose any data, and automatically turn itself off. You must recharge the battery pack when it becomes discharged. Procedures To recharge a battery pack, connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack and plug the other end into a working outlet. The DC IN/Battery indicator glows amber while the battery is being charged. Charging Time The following table shows the approximate time required to charge an exhausted battery fully. Battery type Power off Power on Battery pack about 4 hours about 4.2 hours
(45.6 Wh) Be aware that the charging time when the computer is on is affected by ambient temperature, the temperature of the computer and how you are using the computer. If you make heavy use of external devices for example, the battery might scarcely charge at all during operation. Note that charging time will vary depending on the ambient temperature, the computer's internal temperature, and how the computer is being used. For example, whether the display is set to shut off automatically when idle, whether you make heavy use of external devices powered by the computer, or if the computer's internal storage drive is being accessed frequently by an application. User's Manual 4-7 The battery might not be charged depending on how the computer is being used, and the charge of battery decreases and battery might not be fully charged sometimes. Charging notice The battery might not begin charging immediately under the following conditions:
The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full capacity, charge it at room temperature of between 5C to 35C (41F to 95F). The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance, leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery should begin charging. The DC IN/Battery indicator might show a rapid decrease in battery operating time when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:
The battery has not been used for a long time. The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for a long time. In such cases, do the following:
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power on until the system automatically turns itself off. 2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack on the computer and to a wall outlet that is supplying power. 3. Charge the battery until the DC IN/Battery indicator glows blue. Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal capacity. Monitoring battery capacity Remaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods:
Clicking the battery icon on the Windows Taskbar Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window Wait several seconds to monitor the remaining operating time because the computer needs time to check the remaining capacity of the battery pack and then calculate the remaining operating time, based on this together with the current power consumption. Be aware that the actual remaining operating time might differ slightly from the calculated time. User's Manual 4-8 With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery capacity will gradually decrease. In view of this, it is noted that an often used, older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when both are fully charged. Maximizing battery operating time The usefulness of a battery depends on how long it can supply power on a single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:
Processor speed Screen brightness Internal storage drive power off period How often and for how long you use the internal storage drive and external disk drives, for example, optical disc How much charge the battery contained to begin with How you use optional devices, such as a USB device, to which the battery supplies power Where you store your programs and data Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the keyboard - closing the display saves power The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low temperatures System Sleep Mode System Hibernation Mode Display power off period Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if you are frequently turning the computer off and on Battery pack exhausted time When you turn off the power of your computer with the battery pack fully charged, the battery pack will exhaust within the following approximate period. Battery type Sleep Mode Shut Down Mode Battery pack about 6 days about 190 days
(45.6 Wh) Be aware that the battery pack exhausted time is affected if there are any external devices connected. User's Manual 4-9 Extending battery life To maximize the life of your battery pack, do the following at least once a month:
Turn off the computer's power. 1. 2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power. If it does not turn on, then go to Step 4. 3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time, continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged. However, if the DC IN/Battery indicator flashes or there is some other warning to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4. 4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack on the computer and to a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN/Battery indicator glows amber to indicate that the battery pack is being charged. However, if DC IN/Battery indicator does not glow, this indicates that power is not being supplied. Check the connections for the AC adaptor and the power cord. 5. Charge the battery pack until the DC IN/Battery indicator glows blue. Memory media The computer is equipped with a memory media slot that can accommodate some kinds of memory media with various memory capacities so that you can easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants. Keep foreign objects out of the memory media slot. Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or Keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury. This Memory media slot supports the following memory media:
microSD/SDHC/SDXC Card. Not all memory media have been tested and verified to work correctly. Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all memory media can operate properly. Figure 4-3 Examples of memory media (microSD card) Points to note about the memory media card microSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or User's Manual 4-10 playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or play back protected material on another computer or other device, and you cannot reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment. The supported maximum capacity of memory card is 512 GB. Memory media format New media cards are formatted according to specific standards. If you wish to reformat a media card, be sure to do so with a device that uses media cards. Formatting a memory media card Memory media cards are sold already formatted in conformity to specific standards. If you reformat a memory card, be sure to reformat it with a device such as digital camera or digital audio player that uses the memory cards, not with the format command provided within Windows. To format all areas of the memory card, including the protected area, you must obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy protection system. Media care Observe the following precautions when handling the card. Do not twist or bend cards. Do not expose cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media close to containers of liquid. Do not touch the metal part of a card or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty. After using card, return it to its case. The card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not try to force the card into the slot. Do not leave a card partially inserted in the slot. Press the card until you hear it click into place. Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record data. Memory cards have a limited lifespan, so it is important to back up important data. Do not write to a card if the battery power is low. Low power might affect writing accuracy. Do not remove a card while read/write is in progress. For more details on using memory cards, see manuals accompanying the cards. User's Manual 4-11 Inserting memory media The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To insert memory media, do the following:
1. 2. Turn the memory media so that the contacts (metal areas) face down. Insert the memory media into the memory media slot on your computer. 3. Press the memory media gently until it clicks into place. Figure 4-4 Inserting memory media 1. Memory media slot 2. Memory media Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. Make sure that the memory media is oriented properly before you insert it. If you insert the media in wrong direction, you might not be able to remove it. When inserting the memory media, do not touch the metal contacts. You might expose the storage area to static electricity, which can destroy data. Do not turn off the computer or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode while files are being copied. Failure to do so might cause data loss. Removing memory media The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To remove memory media, do the following:
1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon on the Windows taskbar. 2. Select the memory media that you want to remove. 3. Push the memory media until you hear a click to partially release it. 4. Grasp the media and remove it. If you remove the memory media or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the memory media, you might lose data or damage the media. User's Manual 4-12 12 HDMI out port Do not remove the memory media while the computer is in Sleep or Hibernation Mode. The computer might become unstable or data in the memory media might be lost. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) out port digitally transfers both video and audio data without reducing the quality. HDMI-compatible external display devices including televisions can be connected via the HDMI out port. As the port operation of all external monitors have not been confirmed, some display devices might not function properly. To connect an HDMI-compatible display device, do the following:
To connect a device to the HDMI out port, you must purchase a suitable HDMI cable. 1. Plug one end of the HDMI cable into the HDMI in port of the HDMI display device. Turn the HDMI display device's power on. 2. 3. Plug the other end of the HDMI cable into the HDMI out port on your computer. Figure 4-5 Connecting the HDMI out port 1. HDMI out port 2. HDMI cable Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. Do not plug/unplug an HDMI device under the following conditions:
The system is starting up. The system is shutting down. When you unplug the HDMI cable and replug it, wait at least 5 seconds before you replug the HDMI cable again. User's Manual 4-13 12 Settings for display video on HDMI To view video on the HDMI display device, be sure to configure the settings, otherwise you might find that nothing is displayed. Be sure to select the display device or audio device before starting to play video. Do not change the display device or audio device while playing video. Do not change the display device under the following conditions. While data is being read or written While communication is being carried out LAN The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) or Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T). This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN. The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature. The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device, cable or noise and so on). LAN cable types The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN. Logging onto a LAN using the computers default settings might cause a malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator regarding set-up procedures. If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5e cable or higher. You cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable. If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-
TX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a CAT3 cable. If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you can connect with a CAT3 or higher cable. User's Manual 4-14 Connecting the LAN cable To connect the LAN cable, do the following:
Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system might hang up. Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage might occur. Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage might occur. Turn off the power to all external devices connected to the computer. 1. 2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear the latch click into place. Figure 4-6 Connecting the LAN cable 1. LAN jack 2. LAN cable Product appearance depends on the model you purchased. 3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector or router. Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor before using or configuring a network connection. To disconnect the LAN cable, gently grasp the LAN cable while pressing the latch, and then slowly lift it up to remove it. Wireless display Your computer might support wireless display, a wireless technology which utilizes Wi-Fi to allow the computer to be wirelessly connected to external displays including TVs as extended screens. With wireless display, documents, streamed/local media contents or other online contents can be shared wirelessly with others. To use wireless display, either one of the following devices is required:
A compatible external display with built-in support for wireless display. User's Manual 4-15 12 An external display with HDMI port and a wireless display adaptor. The wireless display adaptor is a device that connects to the external display via HDMI port and can receive Wi-Fi signals from your computer. To wirelessly connect to an external display, you can follow the steps as described below:
1. Go to
(Settings) and click Devices -> Bluetooth & other devices
-> Add Bluetooth or other device. 2. Click Wireless display or dock. Your computer starts searching for the wireless display device. 3. After the wireless display device is searched, follow the on-screen instructions to finish connection. After the connection is established, the name of the wireless display device appears under Projectors. To disconnect the Wireless display device, click the wireless display device name and then click Remove device. Security lock A security lock enables you to anchor your computer to a desk or other heavy object in order to help prevent unauthorized removal or theft. The computer has a security lock slot into which you can attach one end of the security cable, while the other end attaches to a desk or similar object. The methods used for attaching security cables differ from product to product. Refer to the instructions for the product you are using for more information. Connecting the security lock To connect a security cable to the computer, do the following:
Turn the computer so the security lock slot faces you. 1. 2. Align the security cable with the lock slot and secure it in place. Figure 4-7 Security lock 1. Security lock slot 2. Security lock Optional Accessories To make your computer even more powerful and convenient to use, you can add a number of options and accessories. For reference, the following list details some of the items that are available from your reseller or dynabook dealer:
User's Manual 4-16 21 AC Adaptor If you frequently use your computer at more than one site, it might be convenient to purchase an additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in order to remove the need to carry the adaptor with you always. Not all the accessories are available in your region. Contact your reseller or dynabook dealer for more information. Sound System and Video mode This section describes some of the audio control functions. Volume Mixer The Volume Mixer utility lets you control the audio volume for playback of devices and applications under Windows. To launch the Volume Mixer utility, right-click on the speaker icon on the Windows Taskbar, and then select Open Volume Mixer from the sub menu. To adjust the volume level of speakers or headphones, move the Speakers or Headphones slider. To adjust the volume level of an application that you are using, move the slider for the corresponding application. Microphone Level To change the microphone recording level, do the following:
1. Click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Sound -> Recording. 2. Select Microphone Array or External Microphone, and click Properties. 3. On the Levels tab, move the Microphone Array or External Microphone slider to increase or decrease the microphone volume level. If you feel the microphone volume level is inadequate while using an external microphone, move the Microphone Boost slider to a higher level. Realtek Audio Console You can confirm and change the audio configuration using the Realtek Audio Console. To launch the Realtek Audio Console:
Click Start -> Realtek Audio Console. User's Manual 4-17 Main When you launch the Realtek Audio Console, the Main tab shows all available Playback and Recording devices. You can adjust the volume and switch to relate setting pages by clicking the icon in this tab. Speakers/Headphones This tab allows you to set Main Volume, Sound Effects, Default Format and Speaker configuration. Click the Auto Test button internal speakers or the headphone sound is coming from the right direction. at the bottom of this tab to confirm the Microphone Array/External Microphone This tab allows you to set Main Volume, Microphone Effects and Default Format. If the built-in microphones are not equipped, you can connect an external microphone instead. Device advanced settings This tab allows you to choose the type of headphone or microphone and select devices when an external device is plugged in. To choose the type of headphone or microphone, do the following:
1. Plug a headphone or microphone into the headphone/microphone 2. Click the Device advanced settings tab. 3. Select one from the device list under ANALOG for the device you jack. plugged into. When an external headphone or microphone is plugged in, you can turn on/off the multi-stream function for playback or recording under Playback Device or Recording Device in this tab. To use multi-stream function for playback/recording, do the following:
1. Select Make internal and external output devices playback two different audio streams simultaneously, or Separate all input jacks as independent input devices. 2. Click Start ->
(Settings) -> System -> Sound. 3. Click App volume and device preferences under Advanced sound 4. Choose different output/input devices for different players/recorders options. from the drop-down list. User's Manual 4-18 Power Management This tab allows you to adjust the configuration of audio power management to achieve the power saving. Information Video mode This tab shows the driver version and UI version as well. Video mode settings are configured via the Display dialog. To open the Display dialog, click Start ->
Display.
(Settings) -> System ->
If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video playback), you might see some disturbance, flickering, or frame dropping on your screen. If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is displayed properly. User's Manual 4-19 Chapter 5 Utilities and Advanced Usage This chapter describes the utilities and special features of this computer, and the advanced usage of some utilities. Utilities and Applications This section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the computer and details how to start them. For further information on their operation, refer to online manual, help files, or README.TXT file (if applicable) of each utility. You might not have all the software listed in this section depending on the model you purchased. System Password You can set a password in the BIOS setup utility in order to restrict access to the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the passwords. Two levels of password security are provided: User and Administrator. Refer to BIOS setup utility to enter it. Passwords set in the BIOS setup utility are different from the Windows password. An Administrator Password is needed before you set a user password. If you set an Administrator Password, some functions might be restricted when a user logs on with the User Password. When entering the character string to register the password, enter from the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the password file. Starting the computer using a password To enter a password manually, do the following:
1. Turn on the power as described in the Getting Started section. User's Manual 5-1 At this point, the function keys do not work. They will function after you enter the password. 2. Enter the password in the dialog that appears in the screen. 3. Press ENTER. If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, or if you do not enter the password within 1 minute, the computer shuts down. In this case, some features that can power on the computer automatically (Wake-up on LAN, Task Scheduler, etc) might not work. You must turn the computer back on to retry password entry. dynabook Support Utility dynabook Support Utility allows your computer to automatically search for alerts from Dynabook that are specific to your computer system and its programs. On the initial Internet connection, your computer will send some limited system information to Dynabook periodically. The transmission is completely anonymous since no personal identifiable information is collected. To access this utility, click Start -> dynabook Support Utility. The following tabs might be provided:
HomeDisplays the introduction of this utility. AlertsAllows you to check available alerts. System InformationAllows you to view basic information of your computer. BIOS setup utility BIOS setup utility provides you a menu-based user interface so that you can easily view and change BIOS settings. To enter the BIOS setup utility, do the following:
1. Save your work. 2. Click Start ->
3. Hold down the F2 key and then release this key just after the
(Power) and then select Restart. computer is powered on. Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed. 4. To save the changes and exit the utility, press the F10 key and proceed by selecting Yes or select Exit -> Exit Saving Changes -> Yes. The computer restarts immediately. User's Manual 5-2 dynabook Maintenance Utility dynabook Maintenance Utility is provided to erase the internal storage drive. This utility allows you to delete all data and partitions and also overwrite all sectors on the internal storage drive. If there is an external hard disk drive connected to your computer, it can also be erased. However, if you do not want to delete the data from the external hard disk drive, disconnect it from your computer. To access this utility:
(Settings) and click Update & Security -> Recovery. 1. Go to 2. Click Restart now under Advanced startup. 3. Click Troubleshoot -> dynabook Maintenance Utility. If you select the deletion method and continue with the operation, you will lose all data (including the operating system and recovery partition) on the internal storage drives. Make sure that you have already created recovery media if you want to use the computer after erasing your hard disk drive(s). Special features The following features are either unique to dynabook computers or are advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use. Access each function using the following procedures.
*1 To access the Power Options, click Start -> Windows System ->
Control Panel -> System and Security -> Power Options. Display automatic power off *1 Internal storage drive automatic power off *1 System automatic Sleep/Hibernation Mode *1 Power on password This feature automatically cuts off power to the computer's display panel when there is no keyboard input for a specified time, with power being restored the next time a key is pressed. This can be specified in the Power Options. This feature automatically cuts off power to the internal storage drive when it is not accessed for a specified time, with power being restored when the internal storage drive is next accessed. This can be specified in the Power Options. This feature automatically shuts down the system into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode when there is no input or hardware access for a specified time. This can be specified in the Power Options. Two levels of password security, administrator and user, are available to prevent unauthorized access to your computer. User's Manual 5-3 Intelligent power supply *1 A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent power supply detects the battery charge, automatically calculates the remaining battery capacity, and protects electronic components from abnormal conditions such as a voltage overload from the AC adaptor. This can be specified in the Power Options. Battery save mode *1 This feature lets you configure the computer in order to save battery power. This can be specified in the Power Options. Panel power on/off *1 This feature automatically turns power to the Low battery automatic Hibernation Mode *1 Sleep Mode Hibernation Mode computer off when the display panel is closed, and turns it back on when the display panel is opened. This can be specified in the Power Options. When battery power is exhausted to the point that computer operation cannot be continued, the system automatically enters Hibernation Mode and shuts itself down. This can be specified in the Power Options. If you have to interrupt your work, you can use this feature to allow you to turn off power to the computer without exiting from your software. Data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you next turn on the power, you can continue working right where you left off. Refer to the Sleep Mode section for more details. This feature lets you turn off the power to the computer without exiting from your software. The contents of main memory are automatically saved to the internal storage drive so that when you next turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off. You must enable the Hibernation Mode before using this feature. Refer to the Starting Hibernation Mode section for more details. Mode depending on the external devices connected to the USB ports. For example, if a mouse or USB keyboard is connected to a USB port, clicking the mouse button or pressing the keyboard will wake up the computer. USB Wakeup function This function restores the computer from Sleep User's Manual 5-4 Wake-up on Wireless LAN Heat dispersal *1 This computer supports the "Wake-up on Wireless LAN" function. The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function consumes power even when the system is in Sleep Mode/Hibernation Mode. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature. To protect against overheating, the processor is equipped with an internal temperature sensor which activates a cooling fan or lowers the processing speed if the computer's internal temperature rises to a certain level. You are able to select whether to control this temperature by either turning on the fan first, then if necessary lowering the processor speed, or by lowering the processor speed first, then if necessary turning on the fan. Both of these functions are controlled through the Power Options. When the processor's temperature falls within normal range, the fan and the processor operation returns to its standard speed. If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with either setting, the computer automatically shuts down to prevent any damage. In this instance, all unsaved data in memory will be lost. User's Manual 5-5 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Dynabook has designed this computer for durability, however, should problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter to help determine the cause. You should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place. Problem-solving process If you observe the following guidelines, resolving problems will be much easier. Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking further action might result in data loss or damage, or you might destroy valuable problem-related information that can help solve the problem. Observe what is happening. Write down what the system is doing and what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred. Make a screenshot of the current display. Also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this chapter are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem-solving techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few might require help from Technical Support. If you find you need to consult others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much detail as possible. Preliminary checklist You should always consider the simplest solution first. The items detailed in this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a serious problem:
Make sure that you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the computer - this includes your printer and any other external device you are using. Before you attach an external device, you should first turn off the computer, then when you turn the computer back on, it recognizes the new device. Make sure that all optional accessories are configured properly in the computer's setup program and that all required driver software has been loaded (refer to the documentation included with the optional accessories for further information on its installation and configuration). User's Manual 6-1 Check all cables to ensure that they are correctly and firmly attached to the computer - loose cables can cause signal errors. Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for loose pins. Check that your disc media is correctly loaded Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a permanent error log - this helps you to describe your problems to Technical Support. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log you have made helps to identify the problem faster. Analyzing the problem Sometimes the computer gives you clues that can help you identify why it is malfunctioning. In view of this, keep the following questions in mind:
Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, SSD, display panel, Touch Pad, Touch Pad control buttons - as each device produces different symptoms. Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its configuration is set properly. What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or random characters? Make a screenshot of the current display and, if possible, look up the messages in the documentation included with the computer, software, or operating system. Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals. Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do they stay on or blink? Write down what you see. Do you hear any beeps, if so, how many, are they long or short and are they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer making any unusual noises? Write down what you hear. Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to Technical Support. Software The problems might be caused by your software or disk. If you cannot load a software package, the media might be damaged or the program might be corrupted. In these instances, try loading another copy of the software if possible. If an error message appears while you are using a software package, you should refer to the documentation supplied with it as this usually includes a problem-solving section or a summary of error messages. Next, check any error messages against the operating system documentation. User's Manual 6-2 Hardware If you cannot find a software problem, you should then check the setup and configuration of your hardware. First run through the items in the preliminary checklist as described previously, then, if you still cannot correct the problem, try to identify the source. The next section provides checklists for individual components and peripherals. Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an authorized part or product, make sure that the device or software can be used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices might cause injury or might damage your computer. If something goes wrong Your computer does not respond to the keyboard commands If an error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard commands, do the following:
Press the power button and hold it down for ten seconds. Once the computer has turned itself off, wait 10-15 seconds before turning on the power again by pressing the power button. Your program stops responding If you are working with a program that suddenly freezes all operations, chances are the program has stopped responding. You can exit the failed program without shutting down the operating system or closing other programs. To close a program that has stopped responding:
1. Press CTRL, ALT, and DEL simultaneously (once), then click Task Manager. The Windows Task Manager window appears. 2. Select the program you want to close, then click End Task. Closing the failed program should allow you to continue working. If it does not, continue with the next step. 3. Close the remaining programs one by one by selecting the program name, then End Task. Closing all programs should allow you to continue working. If it does not, power off your computer and then restart it. The computer does not start Make sure that you attached the AC adaptor and power cord/cable properly. If you are using the AC adaptor, check that the wall outlet is working by plugging in another device, such as a lamp. User's Manual 6-3 Verify that the computer is on by looking at the Power indicator. If the indicator is glowing, the computer is on. Also, try turning the computer off and then on. If you are using an AC adaptor, verify that the computer is receiving power from the external power source by looking at the DC IN/Battery indicator. If the indicator is glowing, the computer is connected to a live external power source. The computer does not load advanced options during startup By holding down one of the following keys during startup, your computer can load the following advanced options. Key F2 F10 Advanced option BIOS setup utility Boot Menu 0 (zero) Recovery options If your computer starts to load the Operating System instead of desired advanced options, do the following:
1. Click Start ->
2. Hold down the corresponding key and then release this key just after
(Power) and then select Restart. the computer is powered on. Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed. 3. Hardware and system checklist This section discusses problems caused by your computers hardware or attached peripherals. Basic problems might occur in the following areas:
Power Keyboard Internal display panel Internal storage Memory Media Card Pointing device USB device Sound system External monitor LAN Wireless LAN Bluetooth Power When the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery pack is the primary power source. Your computer also has Real-Time Clock (RTC) function. All of the power resources are interrelated with anyone having the ability to produce apparent power problems. User's Manual 6-4 Overheating power down If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with either setting, the computer automatically shuts down to prevent any damage. In this instance, all unsaved data in memory is lost. Problem Procedure Computer shuts down automatically. Leave the computer off until it reaches room temperature. If the computer has reached room temperature and it still does not start, or if it starts but shuts down quickly, contact Technical Support. AC power If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected, check the status of the DC IN/Battery indicator. Refer to the Power Condition Descriptions section for further information. Problem Procedure AC adaptor does not power the computer Check the connections to make sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the computer and a working power outlet. Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If the cord is frayed or damaged, it should be replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth. If the AC adaptor still does not power the computer, you should contact Technical Support. Battery If you suspect a problem with the battery, check the status of the DC IN/
Battery indicator. Problem Procedure Battery does not power the computer The battery might be discharged. Connect the AC adaptor to recharge the battery. Battery does not charge when the AC adaptor is attached. If the battery is completely discharged, it will not begin charging immediately. In these instances, wait a few minutes before trying again. If the battery still does not charge, check that the power outlet of the AC adaptor is connected to its supplying power. This can be tested by plugging another appliance into it. User's Manual 6-5 Problem Procedure Battery does not power the computer as long as expected If you frequently recharge a partially charged battery, the battery might not charge to its full potential. In these instances, you should fully discharge the battery and then attempt to charge it again. Real-Time Clock Problem Procedure The BIOS setting and system date/
time are lost. The lasting time of the Real-Time Clock (RTC) has run out. You must set the date and time in the BIOS setup utility by using the following steps:
1. Launch the BIOS setup utility. Refer to the BIOS setup utility section for further information. 2. Set the date in the System Date field. 3. Set the time in the System Time field. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed. BIOS Problem Procedure The computer cannot be powered on. Disconnect the AC adaptor for several seconds and then reconnect the AC adaptor. After that, press the power button. If it still does not work, press and hold the power button for about 15 seconds. If it still does not operate properly, you should contact your reseller or dealer. Keyboard Keyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the computer. Refer to the The Keyboard section for further information. Problem Procedure Output to screen is garbled Refer to your software documentation to ensure that it is not remapping the keyboard in any way
(remapping involves changing or reassigning the function of each key). If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you should contact Technical Support. User's Manual 6-6 Internal display panel Apparent problems of the computer's display panel might be related to setup and configuration of the computer. Problem No display Procedure Markings appear on the computer's display panel. Press the function keys to adjust the display priority, and to make sure that it is not set for output to an external monitor. These marks might have come from contact with the keyboard and Touch Pad while the display panel has been closed. Try to remove the marks by gently wiping the display panel with a clean dry cloth or, if this fails, with a good quality LCD screen cleaner. In this latter instance, you should always follow the instructions with the screen cleaner and always ensure that you let the display panel dry properly before closing it. Internal Storage Drive Problem Procedure Computer does not boot from internal storage Check to see whether there is a disc in the external optical disc drive - if so remove it and try to start the computer again. Slow performance If this has no effect, check the Boot Priority Options setting under Boot within the BIOS setup utility. The files on the internal storage drive might be fragmented. In this instance you should run the disk defragmentation utility to check the condition of your files and the internal storage drive. Refer to the operating system's documentation or online Help File for further information on operating and using the defragmentation utility. As a last resort, you should reformat the internal storage drive and then reload the operating system and all other files and data. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact Technical Support. Memory Media Card For further information, refer to Operating Basics. User's Manual 6-7 Problem Procedure Memory media card error occurs Remove the memory media card from the computer and then reinsert it to ensure that it is firmly connected. If the problem persists, then you should refer to the documentation supplied with your memory media card for further information. You cannot read a file Check to ensure that the required file is actually on the memory media card that is inserted into the computer. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact Technical Support. Pointing device If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB mouse section and the documentation supplied with your mouse. Touch Pad Problem Procedure The Touch Pad does not work. Check the device settings. Click Start ->
Touchpad.
(Settings) -> Devices ->
Mouse pointer does not respond to pointing device operation In this instance, the system might be busy. Try moving the mouse again after waiting a short while. Double-tapping
(Touch Pad) does not work In this instance, you should initially try changing the double-click speed setting within the Mouse Control utility. 1. To access this utility, click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. 2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the 3. Set the double-click speed as required and Buttons tab. click OK. The mouse pointer moves too fast or too slow In this instance, you should initially try changing the cursor speed within the Touch Pad settings. To access it, click Start ->
Devices -> Touchpad.
(Settings) ->
User's Manual 6-8 Problem Procedure The reaction of Touch Pad is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough. Adjust the touch sensitivity. To access it, click Start ->
Devices -> Touchpad.
(Settings) ->
If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact Technical Support. USB mouse Problem Procedure Mouse pointer does not respond to mouse operation In this instance, the system might be busy. Try moving the mouse again after waiting a short while. Remove the mouse from the computer and then reconnect it to a free USB port in order to ensure that it is firmly attached. Double-clicking does not work In this instance, you should initially try changing the double-click speed setting within the Mouse Control utility. 1. To access this utility, click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. 2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the 3. Set the double-click speed as required and Buttons tab. click OK. In this instance, you should initially try changing the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility. 1. To access this utility, click Start -> Windows System -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse. 2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click the Pointer Options tab. 3. Set the mouse pointer speed as required and click OK. The elements of the mouse responsible for detecting movement might be dirty. Refer to the documentation supplied with the mouse for instructions on how to clean it. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact Technical Support. The mouse pointer moves too fast or too slow The mouse pointer moves erratically User's Manual 6-9 USB device In addition to the information in this section, also refer to the documentation supplied with your USB device. Problem Procedure USB device does not work Remove the USB device from the computer and then reconnect it to a free port in order to ensure that it is firmly attached. Ensure that any required USB device drivers are properly installed. To achieve this, you should refer to both the device documentation and the operating system documentation. Sound system In addition to the information in this section, also refer to the documentation supplied with your audio device. Problem Procedure No sound is heard Press the function keys to increase or decrease volume. Annoying sound is heard Check the software volume settings. Check to see if Mute is turned to Off. Check to make sure that the headphone connection is secure. Check within the Windows Device Manager application to ensure that the sound device is enabled and that the device is properly working. In this instance, you might be experiencing feedback from either the internal microphone or an external microphone connected to the computer. Refer to Sound System and Video mode for further information. Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows start up or shut down. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact Technical Support. External monitor Also refer to Operating Basics, and to the documentation supplied with your monitor for further information. User's Manual 6-10 Problem Procedure Monitor does not turn on No display After confirming that the monitor's power switch is on, check the connections to make sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the monitor and to a working power outlet. Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls on the external monitor. Press the function key in order to change the display priority and ensure that it is not set for the internal display only. Check to see if the external monitor is connected. When the external monitor is set as the primary display device in extended desktop mode, it does not display when the computer wakes up from Sleep Mode if the external monitor has been disconnected while in Sleep Mode. To keep this from happening, do not disconnect the external monitor while the computer is in Sleep or Hibernation Mode. Remember to turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor. When the display panel and an external monitor are set to clone mode and they are turned off by the timer, the display panel or the external monitor might not display when turned on again. If this occurs, press the function key to reset the display panel and external monitor to Clone Mode. When booting up the computer, screen of BIOS setting and etc. might not be indicated correctly if the power saving function of external monitor is enabled. In this case, turn the power of external monitor OFF and ON once (to disable power saving function) and then restart your computer. Display error occurs Check that the cable connecting the external monitor to the computer is firmly attached. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact Technical Support. User's Manual 6-11 LAN Problem Procedure Cannot access LAN Check for a firm cable connection between the LAN jack and the LAN hub. Wake-up on LAN does not work Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is off. If problems persist, consult your LAN administrator. Wireless LAN Problem Procedure Cannot access Wireless LAN Make sure that the wireless communication function of the computer is on. If problems persist, contact your LAN administrator. Bluetooth Problem Procedure Cannot access Bluetooth device Check to ensure that the wireless communication function of the computer is on. Check to ensure that power to the external Bluetooth device is turned on. Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth Adaptor is installed in the computer. The built-in Bluetooth hardware cannot operate simultaneously with another Bluetooth controller. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact Technical Support. Technical support If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having problems operating the computer, you might need to contact us for additional technical assistance. User's Manual 6-12 Before you call Some problems you experience might be related to software or the operating system, so it is important that you investigate other sources of assistance first. Before contacting, try the following:
Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with your software and/or peripheral devices. If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions and consider calling the software company's technical support department for assistance. Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your computer and/or software - they are your best resource for current information and support. Technical support If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware related, read the enclosed warranty booklet or visit the technical support website http://emea.dynabook.com/support-country-selector User's Manual 6-13 Chapter 7 Appendix Specifications This section summarizes the technical specifications of the computer. Physical Dimensions The physical dimensions vary depending on the model you purchased. Size Approximately 362.5 (w) x 240.5 (d) x 19.7 (h) millimeters Approximately 328.0 (w) x 224.8 (d) x 18.9 (h) millimeters
(not including parts that extend beyond the main body) Environmental Requirements Conditions Operating Non-operating Ambient temperature Relative humidity 5C (41F) to 35C
(95F) 20% to 80%
(noncondensing)
-20C (-4F) to 60C
(140F) 10% to 90%
(noncondensing) Wet-bulb temperature 29C maximum Conditions Altitude (from sea level) Operating
-60 to 3,000 meters Non-operating
-60 to 10,000 meters maximum Power Requirements AC adaptor 100-240V AC 50 Hz or 60 Hz (cycles per second) Computer 19V DC User's Manual 7-1 Japan:
Europe:
Austria:
Belgium:
Denmark:
Finland:
France:
Germany:
AC Power Cord and Connectors The AC input plug of the power cord must be compatible with the various international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following specifications:
Wire size:
Minimum 0.75 mm2 Current rating:
Minimum 2.5 amperes Certification agencies China:
CQC U.S. and Canada:
UL listed and CSA certified No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2 Australia:
AS DENANHO OVE Italy:
IMQ CEBEC The Netherlands:
KEMA DEMKO Norway:
FIMKO Sweden:
NEMKO SEMKO LCIE VDE Switzerland:
SEV United Kingdom:
BSI In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VV-F. For the United States and Canada, two-pin plug configuration must be 2-15P (250 V) or 1-15P (125 V) and three-pin plug configuration must be 6-15P (250 V) or 5-15P (125 V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical Code Handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II. The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada, the United Kingdom, Australia, Europe, Middle-East, Africa, South Africa, Switzerland, Italy and China. User's Manual 7-2 USA United Kingdom, South Africa, Middle-East UL approved Australia AS approved BS approved Europe, Africa, South Africa, Middle-East Approved by the appropriate agency Canada China CSA approved State of Israel CCC approved Africa SII approved Switzerland Approved by the appropriate agency Italy Approved by the appropriate agency Approved by the appropriate agency Information for Wireless Devices Wireless Technology Interoperability The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems with Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) /Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:
The IEEE 802.11 Standard on Wireless LANs (Revision a/b/g/n/ac/ax), as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. User's Manual 7-3 Bluetooth Modules are designed to be interoperable with any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:
Bluetooth Specification (depending on the model you purchased), as defined and approved by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group. Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group. This Bluetooth product is not compatible with devices using Bluetooth Version 1.0B specifications. The wireless devices have not completed verification of connection and operation with all devices which are using the Wireless LAN or Bluetooth radio technology. Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio frequency range and might interfere with one another. If you use Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you might occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or even lose your network connection. If you experience any such problem, immediately turn off either one of your Bluetooth or Wireless LAN. Wireless devices and your health Wireless products, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by wireless products however is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Because wireless products operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Dynabook believes wireless products are safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless products might be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations might for example include:
Using the wireless products equipment on board of airplanes, or In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (for example, airports), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the wireless device prior to turning on the equipment. User's Manual 7-4 Wireless LAN Technology The wireless communication function of the computer supports some wireless communication devices. Only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions. Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt Wi-Fi or Bluetooth operation. Turn off all wireless functionalities when near a person who might have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device. Radio waves might affect pacemaker or medical device operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction for your medical device when using any wireless functionality. Always turn off wireless functionality if the computer is near automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment, possibly resulting in serious injury. It might not be possible to make a network connection to a specified network name using the ad hoc network function. If this occurs, the new network (*) has to be configured for all computers connected to the same network in order to re-enable network connections.
* Make sure to use new network name. Security Dynabook strongly recommends that you enable encryption functionality, otherwise your computer is open to illegal access by an outsider using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider might illegally access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or destruction of stored data. Dynabook is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof. Card Specifications Compatibility IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANs Network Operating System Media Access Protocol Microsoft Windows Networking CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgment (ACK) Radio Characteristics Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN module might vary according to:
User's Manual 7-5 Country/region where the product was purchased Type of product Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations. Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed for operation in the license-free 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, local radio regulations might impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless communication equipment. Radio Frequency Band 5 GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision a, n, ac and ax) Band 2.4 GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision b/g, n and ax) The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range might travel larger distances. The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials. Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio that might either absorb or reflect the radio signal. Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25GHz frequency range. High-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5.25 to 5.35GHz and 5.65 to 5.85GHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Bluetooth wireless technology Some computers in this series have Bluetooth wireless communication function which eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices such as computers, printers, and mobile phones. When it is enabled, Bluetooth provides a safe and trustworthy wireless personal area network environment that is quick and easy. You cannot use the built-in Bluetooth functions of the computer and an external Bluetooth adaptor simultaneously. For reference, Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features:
Security Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:
Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible to falsify the origin of a message. Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy. User's Manual 7-6 Worldwide operation The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4 GHz band, which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries in the world. Radio links You can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of each other. Radio Regulatory Information The Wireless device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. This product complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards. Europe Azerbaijan:
Restrictions for Use of 2400.0-2483.5MHz Frequencies in Europe Limited implementation No license needed if used indoor and power not exceeding 30 mW
(14.77dBm). Italy:
Implemented The public use is subject to general authorisation by the respective service provider. User's Manual 7-7 IT Russian Federation:
Limited implementation Using SRD (Short Range Device) with FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum) modulation. 1. Maximum 2.5mW (4dBm) EIRP
(Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power) is permitted to use. 2. Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP is permitted to use with the following conditions:
Permitted to use SRD for outdoor applications without restriction on installation height only for purposes of gathering telemetry information for automated monitoring and resources accounting systems. Permitted to use SRD for other purposes for outdoor applications only when the installation height is not exceeding 10m above the ground surface. 3. Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP. Indoor applications is permitted to use. User's Manual 7-8 Using SRD with DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) and other than FHSS wideband modulation. 1. Maximum EIRP density is 2mW/
MHz. Maximum100mW (20dBm) EIRP is permitted to use. 2. Maximum EIRP density is 20mW/
MHz. Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP is permitted to use with the following condition:
It is permitted to use SRD for outdoor applications only for purposes of gathering telemetry information for automated monitoring and resources accounting systems or security systems. 3. Maximum EIRP density is 10mW/
MHz. Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP. Indoor applications is permitted to use. Ukraine:
Limited implementation EIRP =100mW (20dBm) with built-in antennas maximum gain is 6dBi. Restrictions for Use of 5725-5875MHz Frequencies in Europe Russian Federation:
Limited implementation When duty cycle is 0.1% or using LBT (Listen Before Talk) technology. Antenna height should not exceed 5m, with maximum EIRP 25mW (13.98dBm) is permitted to use. Software Version and Maximum Power Output of the Wireless Module Europe: model AX201D2W Software Version Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Software 21.x and following versions User's Manual 7-9 SAR Value 0.42 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H) 0.92 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H) Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n/ax mode / Bluetooth Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac/ax mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac/ax mode Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Maximum 25mW (13.98dBm) EIRP Europe: model 9462D2W Software Version Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Software 21.x and following versions SAR Value 0.5 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H) Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode / Bluetooth Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Maximum 25mW (13.98dBm) EIRP Europe: model 9560D2W Software Version Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Software 21.x and following versions 0.43 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H) Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP SAR Value 0.99 W/kg (10g) *
Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode / Bluetooth User's Manual 7-10
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Maximum 25mW (13.98dBm) EIRP
* The SAR value shown is the reference value for the unit based on the actual value of the installed WiFi and/or WLAN module. Europe: model 3165D2W Software Version Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Software 21.x and following versions SAR Value 0.57 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H) Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE /
Bluetooth
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode Europe: model AW-CM251NF Software Version SAR Value Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode / Bluetooth Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP Maximum 10mW (10dBm) EIRP Maximum 200mW (23dBm) EIRP The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. AZ_QCA9377_6174_Win10_r105x and following versions 0.90 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H) 0.56 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H) Maximum 126mW (21dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE Maximum 50mW (17dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode Maximum 32mW (15dBm) EIRP The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Maximum 32mW (15dBm) EIRP User's Manual 7-11 Europe: model AW-CM421NF Software Version SAR Value Maximum Power Output
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) IEEE802.11 b/
g/n mode / Bluetooth RTLWlanE_WindowsDriver_2024.0
.10.121_Drv_3.00.0035_Win10.L RTBlueR_Windows10_FilterDriver_ 1030.3000_0529.2020_new_L and following versions 1.12 W/kg (10g) (C50-G/C50-H) 0.87 W/kg (10g) (C40-G/C40-H) Maximum 100mW (20dBm) EIRP
(2400 - 2483.5 MHz) BLE Maximum 6.3mW (8dBm) EIRP
(5150 - 5725 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode
(5745 - 5875 MHz) IEEE802.11 a/n/
ac mode Maximum 80mW (19dBm) EIRP The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Maximum 80mW (19dBm) EIRP To remain in conformance with European spectrum usage laws for Wireless LAN operation, the above 2.4GHz and 5GHz channel limitations apply for outdoor usage. The user should use the wireless LAN utility to check the current channel of operation. If operation is occurring outside of the allowable frequencies for outdoor use, as listed above, the user must contact the applicable national spectrum regulator to request a license for outdoor operation. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS-247 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-247 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5.15-5.25GHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux. User's Manual 7-12 Les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., qu'ils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5.25-5.35GHz et 5.65-5.85GHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-
EL. The term IC before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. Refer to the FCC information section for the detailed information. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the Wireless device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Wireless device shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. In the usual operating configuration, the distance between the antenna and the user should not be less than 20cm. Please refer to the computer users manual for the details regarding antenna location. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca Caution: Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25GHz frequency range. High-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5.25 to 5.35GHz and 5.65 to 5.85GHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Taiwan Article 12 Without permission granted by the NCC, any company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to change frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter original characteristic as well as performance to any approved low power radio frequency devices. User's Manual 7-13 Article 14 The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications. If found, the user shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. The said legal communications means radio communications is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act. The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible with the interference from legal communications or ISM radio wave radiated devices. Australia and New Zealand regulatory compliance This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. When used in the Clamshell mode, a separation distance of 20cm from the antennas will ensure the radio frequency exposure level complies with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Using this equipment in Japan In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400MHz to 2,483.5MHz for second generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station and specified low-power radio station). 1. Important notice The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate within the same range as industrial devices, scientific devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in factory production lines (Other Radio Stations). 1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not interfere with any 2. of the equipment listed above. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio stations, promptly change the frequency being used, change the location of use, or turn off the source of emissions. 3. Contact an authorized service provider if you have problems with interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations. 2. Indication for Wireless LAN The indication shown below appears on this equipment. User's Manual 7-14 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 1. 2. DS : This equipment uses DS-SS modulation. 3. OF : This equipment uses OFDM modulation. 4. 5. 4 : The interference range of this equipment is less than 40 m.
: This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz. It is possible to avoid the band of mobile object identification systems. 3. Indication for Bluetooth The indication shown below appears on this equipment. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz. FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation. 1 : The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.
: This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz. It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object identification systems. 4. About the JEITA 5 GHz Wireless LAN supports W52/W53/W56 Channel. Device Authorization This device obtains the Technical Regulation Conformity Certification and it belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications Business Law of Japan. User's Manual 7-15
(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(4)(1)(2)(3)1/ax/ax Intel Wi-Fi 6 AX201 The Name of the radio equipment: AX201D2W DSP Research, Inc. Approval Number: D180132003 Intel Wi-Fi 6 9462 The Name of the radio equipment: 9462D2W DSP Research, Inc. Approval Number: D170149003 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 9560 The Name of the radio equipment: 9560D2W DSP Research, Inc. Approval Number: D170150003 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 The Name of the radio equipment: 3165D2W DSP Research, Inc. Approval Number: D150112003 Azure Wave Wi-Fi 5 AW-CM251 DSP Research, Inc. Approval Number: D150133003 Azure Wave Wi-Fi 5 AW-CM421 The Name of the radio equipment: AW-CM251NF The Name of the radio equipment: AW-CM421NF Telefication, Inc. Approval Number: D200073201 The following restrictions apply:
Do not disassemble or modify the device. Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device. Information about Intel Authenticate For Intel Authenticate, please refer to www.intel.com/authenticate or related Intel website. Accessibility Accessibility options provided by Windows 10 operating system are accessible through Ease of Access features of Windows settings. It allows you customise your Dynabook notebook the way you want to use it. To see the available features in one of the following ways:
Go to Start and select
(Settings). User's Manual 7-16 For touch screen, slide your finger inward from the screens right edge inward and tap the
(All Settings) icon. Using a keyboard, press the word Settings, then press Enter.
( Windows key ) + I, scroll up to the Then select Ease of Access from the Windows Settings screen. Ease of Access for Dynabook notebook Ease of access options provides those with learning, vision, hearing, mobility and other impairments with the following features categories. Vision Display: To change of text similar to zoom in or out in browser or using the magnifying glass option. You can personalise your background and other colours. Show animations, transparency and automatically hide scroll bars in Windows can be enabled or disabled. The Show notification can be adjusted for 5 seconds, 7 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute and 5 minutes. Cursor & pointer: Makes pointer, cursor and touch feedback easier to see. Change pointer size and colour, cursor thickness, touch feedback and make visual feedback for touch points darker and larger. Magnifier: Makes part or all of your screen bigger allowing words and images easier to see. For more information, refer to Use Magnifier to make things on the screen easier to see. Colour Filters: Makes photos and colours easier to see by applying a colour filter to your screen. Toggle Turn on colour filters to enable or disable this feature. Then, select a colour filter from the menu and see which one best suits you. High contrast: This can be turned on using the toggle under Turn on high contrast. Then, choose a theme from the drop-down menu to customise colour for links and button text. To turn high contrast mode on or off from the sign-in screen, select the Ease of access button
, then turn on the toggle under High Contrast. From the keyboard press Left Alt + Left Shift + Print Screen. Narrator: Screen-reading app built into Windows 10. For more information, refer to How to use Narrator. Click here for more information about making your device easier to see or use without a screen. Hearing Audio: For those with hearing difficulties, this option makes it easier to hear with features like Hear all sounds in one channel, and Display audio alerts visually. User's Manual 7-17 Closed captions: Lets you read the word spoken in the audio portion of a video, TV show or Movie that supports Closed Caption technology. You can select the settings you want and see how they appear in Preview. Click here for more information about making your device easier to hear or use with these visual alternatives to sound. Interaction Speech: Talk instead of type. Press the start dictation or select the microphone button on the touch keyboard. Cortana, the Windows 10 built-in digital assistant can help with setting reminders, opening apps, finding facts, and sending emails and text messages.
(Windows key) + H to Cortana is only available in certain countries and some Cortana features might not be available everywhere. Keyboard: Among many other features, this option allows those with limited typing ability to type by pointing and clicking. Mouse: Allows you to change the size, color of the mouse pointer making it easier to view. Other mouse properties settings are customizable through the Additional mouse options. Eye control: Allows you to setup an eye tracking device. Refer to Compatible Eye tracking device for more information. For more information about Ease of Access and other accessibility features with the preloaded Windows 10 operating system, click here. Others Hardware: Opening and closing lid can be achieved using one hand as shown below. All ports used for input or output device connections are industry standards and can be used to connect to any industry standard compatible third party devices. Power On/Off: User can choose to have their notebook go to sleep mode to avoid having to manually power off or click on Start and then select more information on this feature. The notebook can be configured to resume when the lid is open without having to push the power on button. This can be specified in the Power Options. Right click on the battery icon
(Power) > Shutdown when closing the lid. Click here for in task bar and select Power Options to configure. User's Manual 7-18 Sign-in options: Windows offer a number of sign-in options including biometric and non-biometric, refer to Sign-in options in Chapter 2 of the users manual. Touch Pad: The Touch Pad on the palm rest support several features, refer to Using the Touch Pad section for more information. Keyboard: The number of keys available on your keyboard depends on which region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being available for numerous languages. There are different types of keys, functions keys, Windows special keys, and the keypad overlay. Refer to The Keyboard section for more information. Fingerprint Sensor: Some notebooks configuration have fingerprint sensor for enrolling and recognizing fingerprints. Refer to Using the Fingerprint Sensor section for more information. Battery: When the AC adaptor is not connected, the main power source of the computer is the main battery. Refer to the Battery section for information about charging and caring of the battery pack. Memory Media: The computer is equipped with a memory media slot that can accommodate some kinds of memory media with various memory capacities so that you can transfer data between devices. Refer to Memory media section for more information. HDMI out port: HDMI out port digitally transfers both video and audio data and can be connected to HDMIcompatible external display. Refer to The HDMI out port section for more information. LAN: Your computer may have built-in Ethernet LAN (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or Gigabit Ethernet LAN 1000BASE-T). Refer to LAN section for more information on how to connect/disconnect to a LAN. Wireless Display: Your computer might support wireless display, a wireless technology which utilizes WiFi to allow the computer to be wirelessly connected to external displays including TVs as extended screens. Refer to Wireless display section for more information. Security Lock: This feature enables you to anchor your computer to a desk or other object in order to prevent unauthorised removal or theft. Refer to Security lock section for more information. Sound System and Video mode: This section describes some of the audio controls functions such as volume mixer, Microphone level, Realtek Audio Console and video modes. Refer to Sound Systems and Video mode section for more information. Utilities and Advanced Usage: Your computer comes with pre-
installed utilities such as dynabook Support Utility, BIOS setup utility
(including System Password, etc), and dynabook Maintenance Utility. Refer to Utilities and Advanced Usage section for more information. You might have all the software listed depending on the model you purchased. User's Manual 7-19 Special features: If your computer may come pre-installed with several special features such as Display automatic power off, Internal storage drive automatic power off, System automatic Sleep/
Hibernation Mode, Power on password, Intelligent power supply, Battery save mode, Panel power on/off, Low battery automatic Hibernation Mode, Sleep Mode, Hibernation Mode, USB Wakeup function, Wake-up on Wireless LAN, and Heat dispersal. Refer to Special features section for more information. Troubleshooting: Dynabook has designed this computer for durability, however, should problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in the Troubleshooting section to help determine the cause. You should familiarize yourself with this section as knowing what might go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place. Support: Please visit our support website http://emea.dynabook.com/support-country-selector if you need further assistance. Legal Footnotes Non-applicable Icons Certain computer chassis are designed to accommodate all possible configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, be aware that your selected model might not have all the features and specifications corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the computer chassis. CPU CPU performance in your computer product might vary from specifications under the following conditions:
use of certain external peripheral products use of battery power instead of AC power use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video applications use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided design applications use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000 meters or >3,280 feet above sea level) use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5C to 30C (41
-86F) or >25C (77F) at high altitude (all temperature references are approximate and might vary depending on the specific computer model - contact Technical support for details). CPU performance might also vary from specifications due to design configuration. User's Manual 7-20 Under some conditions, your computer product might automatically shut down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost data or damage to the product when used outside recommended conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum performance, use your computer product only under recommended conditions. Read additional restrictions in your product documentation. Contact technical service and support, refer to Technical support section for more information. 64-Bit Computing Certain 32-bit device drivers and/or applications might not be compatible with a 64-bit CPU/operating system and therefore might not function properly. Memory (Main System) Part of the main system memory might be used by the graphics system for graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main system memory allocated to support graphics might vary depending on the graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size, and other factors. Battery Life Battery life might vary considerably depending on product model, configuration, applications, power management settings, and features utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are achieved on select models and configurations tested by Dynabook at the time of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery might not charge while computer is consuming full power. After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery loses its ability to perform at maximum capacity and needs to be replaced. This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery pack, see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer. Internal Storage Drive Capacity 1 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10. The computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems, such as Microsoft Operating System and/or pre-installed software applications, or media content. Actual formatted capacity might vary. User's Manual 7-21 LCD Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic characteristic of LCD technology. Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode. Screen dims when the computer is operated on battery power and you might not be able to increase the brightness of the screen. Wireless LAN The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which wireless LAN can reach might vary depending on surrounding electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations. The actual transmission speed is lower than the theoretical maximum speed. Copy Protection Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media. User's Manual 7-22 Index A B C D E AC adaptor additional 4-17 connecting 2-2 DC IN 19V jack 3-2 Battery extending life 4-10 monitoring capacity 4-8 real time clock 4-6 save mode 5-4 Bluetooth 7-6 Cleaning the computer 1-18 Cooling vents 3-4 DC IN/Battery indicator 3-9 Display automatic power off 5-3 screen 3-7 Dual Pointing Device Touch Pad 6-8 problems 6-11 Hard disk drive automatic power off 5-3 Keyboard function keys 4-3 Function keys F1...F12 4-3 problems 6-6 Windows special key 4-4 LAN cable types 4-14 connecting 4-15 LAN jack 4-15 Media care Card care 4-11 Memory card care 4-11 memory media card inserting 4-12 removing 4-12 Memory media slot 4-10 H K L M Equipment checklist 2-1 microSD/SDHC/SDXC Card note 4-10 External monitor User's Manual Index-1 SD/SDHC/SDXC Card formatting 4-11 Security lock 4-16 Sleep Mode setting 2-9 System automatic 5-3 Sound system problems 6-10 USB device problems 6-10 Video mode 4-19 U V W Web Camera 3-6 Wireless communication 7-5 Moving the computer 1-19 S P Password power on 5-3 Power Hibernation Mode 2-10 panel on/off 5-4 Shut Down mode 2-8 Sleep Mode 2-9 turning off 2-8 turning on 2-5 Problems AC power 6-5 Analyzing the problem 6-2 Battery 6-5 Dual Pointing device 6-8 External monitor 6-10 Hardware and system checklist 6-4 HDD 6-7 Internal display panel 6-7 Keyboard 6-6 Memory Media Card 6-7 Overheating power down 6-5 Power 6-4 Real Time Clock 6-6 Sound system 6-10 Technical support 6-12 Touch Pad 6-8 USB device 6-10 USB mouse 6-9 R Recovery hard disk drive 2-14 Recovery Media 2-13 User's Manual Index-2
various | User Manual | Users Manual | 3.79 MiB | May 07 2018 / January 01 2019 |
Lenovo ideapad D330-10IGM User Guide Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Guide first. Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information The latest electronic compliance and environmental information are available from the Lenovo compliance information Web sites.
- To view compliance information go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/compliance.
- To download environmental information go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 10. If you are using another Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. The screenshots of operating system are for reference only. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice For details, refer to Guides & Manuals at http://support.lenovo.com. First Edition (March 2018) Copyright Lenovo 2018. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer ......................................... 1 Top view ..................................................................................................................... 1 Left-side view ............................................................................................................ 6 Right-side view .......................................................................................................... 8 Rear View ................................................................................................................... 9 Bottom view ............................................................................................................. 10 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 ............................................. 11 Configuring the operating system for the first time .................................................................................................................... 11 Operating system interfaces .................................................................................. 11 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down ...................................................................................................................... 14 Connecting to a wireless network ........................................................................ 16 Get help from Windows ......................................................................................... 17 Chapter 3. Recovery system ............................................................... 18 Push-button reset .................................................................................................... 18 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting ................................................................ 20 Frequently asked questions ................................................................................... 20 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................... 22 Trademarks .......................................................................................... 25 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Note: The dashed areas indicate parts that are not visible externally. Attention:
Do not open the display panel beyond 170 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful not to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a Integrated camera b Wireless LAN antennas Use the camera for video communication. Connect to a wireless LAN adapter to send and receive wireless radio signals. c Computer display The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant d Touch pad visual output. The touch pad functions as a conventional mouse. Touch pad: To move the pointer on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move. Touch pad buttons: The functions of the left/right side correspond to those of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touch pad by pressing Fn + (
). 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using the keyboard Hotkeys You can access certain system settings quickly by pressing the appropriate hotkeys. Mutes/unmutes the sound. Decreases the volume level. Increases the volume level. Enables/disables the touch pad. Enables/disables airplane mode. Decreases display brightness. Increases display brightness. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Setting hotkey mode By default, the hotkey functions are accessible by pressing the appropriate hotkey. However, you can disable the hotkey mode in the BIOS setup utility. To disable the hotkey mode:
1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. 3 In the BIOS setup utility, open the Configuration menu, and change the setting of Hotkey Mode from Enabled to Disabled. 4 Open the Exit menu, and select Exit Saving Changes. Note: If you changed the Hotkey Mode from Enabled to Disabled in the BIOS setup utility, you will need to press the Fn key in combination with the appropriate hotkey. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn a; then press one of the function keys b. The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + B:
Fn + P:
Fn + S:
Fn + K:
Fn + I:
Fn + T:
Fn + 4:
Fn + Sp:
Fn + Tab:
Fn + D:
Fn + Q:
Break Pause SysRq ScrLk Insert PrtScn Sleep Keyboard Backlight Magnifier Utility Toggle Privacy Filter Quiet Mode Note: Hidden Functions applied only on systems where applicable. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a USB 2.0 port b Combo audio Connects to USB devices. Connects to headsets. jack Notes:
The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. The recording function may not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug
(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver has been installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after it has been connected, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data to that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the Windows notification area to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a Power button b Volume up/down button c Type-C port d AC power adapter jack e USB 2.0 port Press this button to turn on/off the computer. When the computer is on, press and hold this button for more than 1 second, the computer will enter sleep mode, press and hold it for more than 4 seconds, the computer will be turned off. Increases/decreases the volume level. Type-C port supports:
USB 3.1 Connects to the AC power adapter. Connects to USB devices. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Rear View - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a Rear camera (on Use the camera for video communication or taking photos. select models) 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a Hinge Boss Bracket b Pogo pin frame c Micro SD card slot Accepts a micro SD card (not supplied). 10 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below:
Accepting the end user license agreement Configuring the Internet connection Registering the operating system Creating a user account Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The return of the Start menu Windows 10 comes with a powerful and useful start menu. To open the start menu, do one of the following:
Select the Start button in the lower-left corner, the Start menu is displayed. Press the Windows key on the keyboard. 11 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 The power button is on the Start menu, click it you can choose to shut down or restart the computer, or put the computer into sleep mode. Through the Start menu, you can locate all the installed apps or view the frequently used apps. The ACTION CENTER Select the ACTION CENTER icon CENTER is displayed. on the taskbar and the ACTION From the ACTION CENTER, you can examine important notifications from Windows and your apps. Moreover, you can change common settings quickly. 12 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 Task View in taskbar In Windows 10, you can add a new desktop and switch between different desktops. To add a new desktop, do the following:
Click the Task View icon in the taskbar area. Click New desktop. To switch between desktops, click the Task View icon desired desktop.
, then select your 13 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting your computer to sleep If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer to sleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. To put the computer to sleep, do one of the following:
Close the display lid. Press and hold the Power key for about 1 to 5 seconds. Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. Select Power Sleep. Note: Put your computer to sleep before you move it. Moving your computer while the hard disk drive is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake up the computer, perform the following:
Press any key on the keyboard. 14 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 Shutting down the computer If you are not going to use your computer for a long time, shut it down. To shut down your computer, do one of the following:
Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. Select Power Shut down. Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner and select Shut down or sign out Shut down. 15 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 Connecting to a wireless network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless functions, do one of the following:
Click the ACTION CENTER icon in the notification area, and then deselect Airplane mode. Press Click Settings to disable airplane mode. Network & Internet Airplane mode to open the network configuration page. Then toggle the airplane mode switch to Off. Connecting to a wireless network After wireless has been enabled, the computer will automatically scan for available wireless networks and display them in the wireless network list. To connect to a wireless network, click the network name in the list, and then click Connect. Note: Some networks require a network security key or passphrase for connection. To connect to one of those networks, ask the network administrator or the Internet service provider (ISP) for the security key or passphrase. 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 10 Get help from Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
If you have a problem with the operating system, see the Windows Get started app. To open it, do the following:
Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. Select Get started from All apps. 17 Chapter 3. Recovery system Push-button reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Push-button reset is a built-in recovery tool that enables users to restore their operating system to its original state. This preserves their data and important customizations, without the need to back up their data in advance. The following Push-button reset features are available to users from multiple locations within Windows:
Refreshing the computer Fixes software problems by reinstalling the factory default configuration. This preserves the users data, important settings, and any Windows Store apps previously purchased from the Windows Store. Resetting the computer Prepares the computer for recycling or transfer of ownership. This reinstalls the factory default configuration and returns all user data and applications to the state of their original Out-of-Box Experience (OOBE). Using Push-button reset Push-button reset can be launched using one of the following methods:
Novo button:
- Shut down the computer and wait at least five seconds. Press the Novo button and then select System Recovery. Settings:
- Settings Update & security Recovery Advanced startup select Restart now. For more instructions, see the Windows Help and Support file on your computer. When I purchased my computer, it included a copy of Windows. How can I determine whether the copy of Windows is preinstalled by Lenovo?
On the outside of the sales package of your computer, you should find a label containing configuration information for your computer. Check the printed string next to OS. If it contains Windows or WIN, the copy of Windows was preinstalled by Lenovo. 18 Chapter 3. Recovery system I uninstalled a preinstalled software, but there is no significant increase in the free drive space. The copy of Windows running on your computer may be Compact technology enabled. For computers with Compact technology enabled Windows, the majority of files needed for preinstalled software are installed on the Recovery Partition and wont be deleted through normal uninstallation. How can I determine whether the Windows running on my computer is Compact technology enabled?
Compact technology is normally enabled on copies of Windows 10 Update running on SSD (or eMMC) -only computer models. To check your computer, 1 Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner and select Disk Management. 2 The Disk Management program starts. If Wim Boot is labeled on the Windows partition (as illustrated), Compact technology is enabled on your copy of Windows. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?
If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, first check the installation program on the D partition of your hard disk (for select models, on the C partition). If you cannot find the drivers for all the hardware devices that you need there, download the drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website. Note: The Lenovo support Web site contains the latest drivers. 19 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section lists frequently asked questions by category. Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?
The Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide which came with your computer contains safety precautions for using your computer. Read and follow all the precautions when using your computer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?
You can find hardware specification for your computer on the printed flyers which came with your computer. Where can I find warranty information?
For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?
Your computer does not come with installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software. If you need to reinstall any preinstalled software, you can find the installation program on the D partition of your hard disk
(for select models, on the C partition). If you cannot find the installation program there, you can also download it from the Lenovo consumer support website. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?
If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, Lenovo provides drivers for all the hardware devices that you need on the D partition of your hard disk (for select models, on the C partition). You can also download the latest device drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website. 20 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?
The BIOS setup utility is ROM-based software. It displays basic computer information and provides options for setting boot devices, security, hardware mode, and other preferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?
To start the BIOS setup utility:
1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. How can I change the boot mode?
There are two boot modes: UEFI and Legacy Support. To change the boot mode, start the BIOS setup utility and set boot mode to UEFI or Legacy Support on the boot menu. When do I need to change the boot mode?
The default boot mode for your computer is UEFI mode. If you need to install a legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc (that is, any operating system before Windows 8) on your computer, you must change the boot mode to Legacy Support. The legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc cannot be installed if you don't change the boot mode. Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?
See Chapter 3. Getting help and service of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 21 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. If the screen is blank, make sure that:
- The AC power adapter is connected to the computer, and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.
- The computer power is on. Press the Power key again for confirmation. If these items are set correctly, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. The screen goes blank while the computer is on. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to its original factory contents using Push-button reset. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your power management is enabled. Perform the following to resume from sleep mode:
- Press any key on the keyboard. Sleep problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC power adapter to the computer. Make sure that:
- The battery is charged.
- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 22 The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work. Display panel problems The screen is blank. Chapter 4. Troubleshooting If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Windows button or the Power key. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the Power key for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not reset, remove the AC power adapter. Do the following:
) to make the screen brighter.
- If you are using the AC power adapter or the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press F12 (
- If the power indicator is blinking, press the Power key to resume from sleep mode.
- If the problem persists, follow the solution in the next problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Make sure that:
- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.
- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Is the operating system or programs installed correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speakers even when the volume is turned up. Make sure that:
- The Mute function is off.
- The combo audio jack is not being used.
- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 23 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Recharge the battery. To turn off your computer, press and hold the Power key for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC power adapter. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on. Otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using high power consumption external devices, such as an external USB optical drive, use an external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or the system may shut down as a result. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.
-or-
Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. Other problems Your computer does not respond. The connected external device does not work. 24 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 25 L e n o v o C h n a 2 0 1 8 i en-US Rev. AA00 en-US Rev. AA00 Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:
Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty.
What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 1 Lenovo limited warranty
How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at: www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Provider's normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location.
Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:
follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty its replacement ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service 2 Lenovo limited warranty
What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price.
Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. 3 Lenovo limited warranty
Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovo's privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/.
What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:
uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product loss of, or damage to, your data by a product any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials damage caused by a non-authorized service provider failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed
Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. 4 Lenovo limited warranty UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 5 Lenovo limited warranty Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Australia Lenovo means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
What this Warranty Covers:
Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
Replacement Products and Parts:
When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovo's property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. 6 Lenovo limited warranty The following is added to the same section in Part 1:
Use of Personal Contact Information:
Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
Limitation of Liability:
Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. 7 Lenovo limited warranty THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:
Your Other Rights:
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:
Use of Personal Information:
Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email:
lensyd_au@lenovo.com Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:
8 Lenovo limited warranty
Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center
(SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings.
European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:
Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:
Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 9 Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Notebook:
81H3 Korea China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China
(Macau S.A.R.), India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Sri Lanka, Singapore Colombia, Argentina, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador, Mexico Austria, Germany, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, the United Kingdom Australia, New Zealand, Japan Brazil Canada Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Armenia, Uzbekistan, Tajikistan, Kyrgyzstan, Mongolia Moldova Taiwan South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Uganda, Morocco, Tunisia, Algeria, Cote divoire, Angola, UAE, Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Qatar, Botswana, Oman, Egypt, Pakistan, Cameroon, Democratic Republic of Congo, Djibouti, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iraq, Malta, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mozambique, Namibia, Rwanda, Senegal, Seychelles, Tanzania, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe parts and labor -
1 year battery pack -
1 year Types of warranty service 3, 4 1, 4 1, 3 4 10 Lenovo limited warranty Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service Notebook:
81H3 Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Belgium, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Switzerland, Lithuania, Latvia Hungary, Romania, Bulgaria Czech Republic, Slovakia Saudi Arabia Greece, Serbia, Montenegro, Croatia, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Slovenia, Albania, Macedonia, Cyprus Poland France Turkey United States of America parts and labor -
2 years battery pack -
1 year parts and labor -
2 years battery pack -
2 years parts and labor -
1 year limited*
warranty battery pack - 1 year 1, 3 4 1, 4 1, 3 1, 4 1, 3
* Excludes some components. 90-day limited warranty for power adapters, keyboards, plastics and hinges. If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. 11 Lenovo limited warranty
Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-service CRUs. Optional-service CRUs are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 12 Lenovo limited warranty 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovo's risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovos expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 13 Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the product with the given MT numbers. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. ENERGY STAR information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers. Lenovo ideapad D330-10IGM 81H3 By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:
14 Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 10 Power plan: balanced (plugged in) Turn off the display:
After 10 minutes Put the computer to sleep:
After 30 minutes Advanced power settings:
- Turn off hard disks:
After 20 minutes To awaken your computer from a sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Get Started information system. 15 Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The following information refers to Lenovo ideapad D330-10IGM, machine type 81H3.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 16 Product specific Notices Responsible party:
Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900
Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/
108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. 17 Product specific Notices Deutschland:
Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo
(Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. 18 Product specific Notices
European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive or Radio Equipment Directive Models without a radio device: This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC (until 19 April, 2016) and Council Directive 2014/30/EU (from 20 April, 2016) on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Models with a radio device: This product is in conformity with all the requirements and essential norms that apply to EU Council Directive (R&TTE Directive) 1999/5/EC. European Council Directive 1999/5/EC remains in force during the transition period of European Council Directive 2014/53/EU until 12 June, 2017 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia Export Control Classification Notice (ECCN) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations
(EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. 19 Specifications Model Name: Lenovo ideapad D330-10IGM Machine Type: 81H3 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Processor Appr. 249 mm 178 mm 9.5 mm Appr. 610g (Tablet) / 525g (Dock) 10.1-inch See the system properties of your computer, you can do this as follows:
Click Control Panel, then click Hardware and Sound, click Device Manager under Devices and Printers and double click Processors. DDR4 8 GB eMMC 1920 1200 pixels FHD/1280 800 pixels HD LED Type-C (USB 3.1) 1, USB 2.0 2 (On Dock) Combo audio jack 1 Micro SD Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity SSD Interface Display Display resolution
(LCD) LCD backlight I/O Ports USB Audio Memory card slot 20 Specifications Battery pack Type Li-Polymer 2 cell, 39Wh Cells/Capacity Note: The capacity given here is the typical or average capacity as measured in a specific test environment. Capacities measured in other environments may differ but are no lower than the rated capacity (see product label). AC power adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera 100-240 V, 50-60 Hz 20 V DC 45 W HD 21 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 22
various | User Manual 20170829 v1 - Technical-User Manual | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB |
E13440 Revised Edition V2 / August 2017 User Guide E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 1 2017/8/22 01:58:26 Hardware Setup Front View Front camera Camera indicator Touch screen panel Back View 2 MicroSD card slot (hidden) Kickstand E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 2 2017/8/22 01:58:26 ASUS Tablet User Manual Top and bottom sides Array microphones Power button Hinge hole Hinge hole Power indicator Dock port Left and right sides Audio speakers USB 3.0 port Headphone/Headset jack Micro USB 2.0 port Micro HDMI port Volume button Audio speakers NOTE: Certain USB 3.0 devices may cause interference with wireless transmission. ASUS Pen (on selected models) Right-click button Eraser button E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 3 2017/8/22 01:58:26 3 ASUS Tablet User Manual ASUS Mobile Dock (optional) NOTE:
The keyboards layout may vary per model, region, or country. The ASUS Mobile Dock may be sold separately. Top View Latch hook Dock connector Latch hook Hinge Keyboard Touchpad 4 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 4 2017/8/22 01:58:27 ASUS Tablet User Manual WARNING! Keep the magnetic attachment away from external storage drives and cards with magnetic strips to prevent demagnetization. Refer to E-Manual for details. 5 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 5 2017/8/22 01:58:27 ASUS Tablet User Manual Getting started 1. Charge your ASUS Tablet A. B. C. Connect the micro USB cable to the power adapter. Plug the micro USB connector into your ASUS Tablet. Plug the power adapter into a grounded power outlet. Charge the ASUS Tablet before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. Use only the bundled power adapter for charging. 2. Powering on your ASUS Tablet 6 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 6 2017/8/22 01:58:28 ASUS Tablet User Manual Safety notices for your ASUS Tablet CAUTION!
This ASUS Tablet should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your ASUS Tablet and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. The power adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. Do not leave your ASUS Tablet on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your ASUS Tablet. IMPORTANT!
Locate the input/output rating label on your ASUS Tablet and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some ASUS Tablet models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your ASUS Tablet is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your ASUS Tablet on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your ASUS Tablet. To disconnect your ASUS Tablet from its main power supply, unplug your ASUS Tablet from the power socket. The power adapter varies with model type. Use only the bundled power adapter. Power adapter information:
- Input voltage: 100-240Vac
- Input frequency: 50-60Hz
- Rating output current: 2A (18W)
- Rating output voltage: 9V E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 7 2017/8/22 01:58:28 7 ASUS Tablet User Manual WARNING!
Read the following precautions for your ASUS Tablets battery. Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device
(for non-removable battery only). The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your ASUS Tablets battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery
(for non-removable battery only). Discontinue usage if leakage is found. This battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant.
(French) RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Councils recommended limit for mobile devices is the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/Kg averaged over 10 gram of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For next-to-body operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard EN 50566 and EN 62209-2. SAR is measured with the device directly contacted to the body while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the mobile device. WARNING! A minimum separation distance of 1 cm must be maintained between the users body and the device, including the antenna during body-worn operation to comply with the RF exposure requirements in Europe. 8 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 8 2017/8/22 01:58:28 ASUS Tablet User Manual Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment causes harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by doing one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.
(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 9 2017/8/22 01:58:28 9 ASUS Tablet User Manual Slave Equipment This device is a slave equipment. This device is not radar detection and not ad-hoc operation in the DFS band. RF Exposure Warning This equipment complies with FCC RF exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The equipment must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. 10 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 10 2017/8/22 01:58:28 ASUS Tablet User Manual RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency
(RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with: Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations, EU REACH SVHC, Korea RoHS UL Safety Notices DO NOT use the ASUS Tablet near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the ASUS Tablet during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the ASUS Tablet in the vicinity of a gas leak. DO NOT dispose the ASUS Tablet battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 11 2017/8/22 01:58:28 11 ASUS Tablet User Manual Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada (IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR) limits when installed in specific host products operated in portable exposure conditions. Canadas REL (Radio Equipment List) can be found at the following web address:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=eng Additional Canadian information on RF exposure also can be found at the following web address:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 and CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Canada, avis dIndustrie Canada (IC) Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes ICES-003 et CAN ICES- 3(B)/NMB-3(B). Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, notamment les interfrences qui peuvent affecter son fonctionnement. 12 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 12 2017/8/22 01:58:28 ASUS Tablet User Manual Informations concernant lexposition aux frquences radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par cet appareil sans fil est infrieure la limite dexposition aux frquences radio dIndustrie Canada (IC). Utilisez lappareil sans fil de faon minimiser les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce priphrique a t valu et dmontr conforme aux limites SAR (Specific Absorption Rate Taux dabsorption spcifique) dIC lorsquil est install dans des produits htes particuliers qui fonctionnent dans des conditions dexposition des appareils portables. Ce priphrique est homologu pour lutilisation au Canada. Pour consulter lentre correspondant lappareil dans la liste dquipement radio (REL - Radio Equipment List) dIndustrie Canada rendez-vous sur: http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch. do?lang=eng Pour des informations supplmentaires concernant lexposition aux RF au Canada rendez-vous sur : http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html IC Warning Statement This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur, exception faites des radios intgres qui ont t testes. La fonction de slection de lindicatif du pays est dsactive pour les produits commercialiss aux tats-Unis et au Canada. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. Green ASUS notice ASUS is devoted to creating environment-friendly products and packaging to safeguard consumers health while minimizing the impact on the environment. The reduction of the number of the manual pages complies with the reduction of carbon emission. For detailed user manual and related information, refer to the user manual included in the ASUS Tablet or visit the ASUS Support site at https://www.asus.com/support/. 13 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 13 2017/8/22 01:58:28 ASUS Tablet User Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/REACH.htm. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. For France, headphones/earphones for this device are compliant with the sound pressure level requirement laid down in the applicable EN 50332-1:2013 and/or EN 50332-2:2013 standard required by French Article L.5232-1. 14 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 14 2017/8/22 01:58:29 ASUS Tablet User Manual Caution
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-
5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment:
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;
(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-5825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.
(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 15 2017/8/22 01:58:29 15 ASUS Tablet User Manual Copyright Information You acknowledge that all rights of this Manual remain with ASUS. Any and all rights, including without limitation, in the Manual or website, are and shall remain the exclusive property of ASUS and/or its licensors. Nothing in this Manual intends to transfer any such rights, or to vest any such rights to you. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. Copyright 2017 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Limitation of Liability Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. Service and Support For complete E-Manual version, refer to our multi-language website at:
https://www.asus.com/support/
16 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 16 2017/8/22 01:58:29 ASUS Tablet User Manual Regional notice for Singapore Complies with IMDA Standards DB103778 This ASUS product complies with IMDA Standards. Japan Technical Conformity Mark The internal wireless module of this ASUS Tablet has been certified by Japan Telec. 003-150189 D150133003 Regional notice for California WARNING Cancer and Reproductive Harm -
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01% by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule II of the Rule. Proper disposal Do not throw your ASUS Tablet in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product
(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 17 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 17 2017/8/22 01:58:29 ASUS Tablet User Manual Simplified EU Declaration of Conformity ASUSTek Computer Inc. hereby declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Full text of EU declaration of conformity is available at https://www.asus.com/support/. The WiFi operating in the band 5150-5350MHz shall be restricted to indoor use for countries listed in the table below:
AT DE LV NO FI BE IS LI PL SE BG IE LT PT CH CZ IT LU RO UK DK EL HU SI HR EE ES MT SK FR CY NL TR RED RF Output table Function WiFi Bluetooth Frequency 2412 - 2472 MHz 5150 - 5350 MHz 5470 - 5725 MHz 2402 - 2480 MHz Frequency GSM 900 GSM 1800 WCDMA I WCDMA VIII LTE 1 LTE 3 LTE 7 LTE 8 LTE 20 LTE 28 18 Maximum Output Power (EIRP) 17 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm 7 dBm Maximum Output Power 33.5 dBm 30.5 dBm 24.5 dBm 24.5 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 18 2017/8/22 01:58:29 ASUS Tablet User Manual E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 19 2017/8/22 01:58:29 19 ASUS Tablet User Manual 20 E13440_T103HAF_2-in-1_UM_V2_20pages.indd 20 2017/8/22 01:58:29 ASUS Tablet User Manual
various | User Manual 20171025 v1 - (QCNFA425) UserMan | Users Manual | 1.48 MiB | April 12 2017 |
E13094 First Edition / October 2017 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2017 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support/
2 Notebook PC E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your Notebook PC ..............................................................................................9 Caring for your Notebook PC .....................................................................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup Getting to know your Notebook PC ...................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................17 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................18 Left Side .............................................................................................................................20 Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC Getting started ...........................................................................................................24 Charge your Notebook PC ...........................................................................................24 Lift to open the display panel ....................................................................................26 Press the power button ................................................................................................26 Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad .....................................27 Using touch screen panel gestures ..........................................................................27 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................30 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................37 Function keys ...................................................................................................................37 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................38 Rotating the display panel .....................................................................................39 3 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................42 Start menu ...................................................................................................................43 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................45 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................46 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................46 Task view .......................................................................................................................49 Snap feature ................................................................................................................50 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................50 Action Center ..............................................................................................................52 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................53 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................55 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................55 Bluetooth ...........................................................................................................................56 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................57 Turning your Notebook PC off ..............................................................................58 Putting your Notebook PC to sleep ....................................................................59 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................62 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................62 BIOS ................................................................................................................................62 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................62 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................63 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................70 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................71 4 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your Notebook PC ........................................................................74 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................75 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................78 Appendices DVD-ROM Drive Information ......................................................................................82 Blu-ray ROM Drive Information .................................................................................84 Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................84 Overview ............................................................................................................................85 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................85 Non-Voice Equipment ...................................................................................................85 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................87 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................88 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................89 Compliance Statement of Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED) .........................................................89 Dclaration de conformit de Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada (ISED) ...............................90 Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information ........................................................91 Informations concernant l'exposition aux frquences radio (RF) .................91 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................91 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................92 Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................93 TV Notices .........................................................................................................................93 5 Notebook PC E-Manual REACH .................................................................................................................................93 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................93 Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................93 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................94 CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) ..............................95 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................97 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................97 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................98 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................98 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................98 Coating Notice .................................................................................................................98 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................99 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................99 Notices for removable batteries ................................................................................99 Avis concernant les batteries remplaables..........................................................99 National Telecommunications Commission of the Philippines .....................99 Simplified EU Declaration of Conformity ...............................................................100 RED RF Output table ......................................................................................................100 6 Notebook PC E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your Notebook PC, organized through the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your Notebook PC. Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your Notebook PC. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your Notebook PC. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your Notebook PC. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your Notebook PC. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your Notebook PC. 7 Notebook PC E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:
IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your Notebook PC's data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your Notebook PC.
= Use the touch screen panel.
= Use the touchpad.
= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold
= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic
= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 Notebook PC E-Manual Safety precautions Using your Notebook PC This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your Notebook PC and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your Notebook PC on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your Notebook PC. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your Notebook PC with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your Notebook PC through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. 9 Notebook PC E-Manual Caring for your Notebook PC Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your Notebook PC. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your Notebook PC using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your Notebook PC. Do not place objects on top of your Notebook PC. Do not expose your Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your Notebook PC near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your Notebook PC to dusty environments. Do not use your Notebook PC near gas leaks. 10 Notebook PC E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your Notebook PC in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product
(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-
containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 Notebook PC E-Manual 12 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 1:
Hardware Setup 13 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting to know your Notebook PC Top View NOTE: The keyboard's layout may vary per region or country. The Notebook view may also vary in appearance depending on the Notebook PC model. 14 Notebook PC E-Manual Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. 360-adjustable touch screen panel Your Notebook PCs touch screen panel can be adjusted all the way into a 360 angle. This feature allows you to quickly turn your device from a Notebook PC into a touch-enabled tablet PC. This high-definition touch screen panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. It also allows you to operate it using touch screen gestures. NOTE: For more details on how to turn your Notebook PC into a tablet device, refer to the Rotating the display panel section in this manual. 15 Notebook PC E-Manual Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. 16 Notebook PC E-Manual Bottom NOTE: The bottom side may vary in appearance depending on model. WARNING! The bottom of the Notebook PC can get warm to hot while in use or while charging the battery pack. When working on your Notebook PC, do not place it on surfaces that can block the vents. IMPORTANT! Battery time varies by usage and by the specifications for this Notebook PC. The battery pack cannot be disassembled. Audio speakers The built-in audio speakers allow you to hear audio straight from your Notebook PC. Audio features are software-controlled. 17 Notebook PC E-Manual Right Side Power indicator The power indicator lights up when the Notebook PC is turned on and blinks slowly when the Notebook PC is in sleep mode. Power button Press the power button to turn your Notebook PC on or off. You can also use the power button to put your Notebook PC to sleep or hibernate mode and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your Notebook PC becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC shuts down. 18 Notebook PC E-Manual USB 2.0 port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) port is compatible with USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 devices such as keyboards, pointing devices, flash disk drives, external HDDs, speakers, cameras and printers. Headphone/Headset jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset. NOTE: This port does not support three-conductor 3.5 mm microphones. 19 Notebook PC E-Manual Left Side Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:
Color Solid Green Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. 20 Notebook PC E-Manual Power (DC) input port Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. WARNING! The adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. IMPORTANT! Use only the bundled power adapter to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. USB 3.0 port The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. HDMI port This port is for the HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector and is HDCP compliant for HD DVD, Blu-ray, and other protected content playback. MicroSD card slot This built-in memory card reader slot supports microSD, microSDHC, and microSDXC card formats. 21 Notebook PC E-Manual 22 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 2:
Using your Notebook PC 23 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting started Charge your Notebook PC A. Connect the DC power connector into your Notebook PCs power
(DC) input port. B. Plug the AC power adapter into a 100V~240V power source. Charge the Notebook PC for 3 hours before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. IMPORTANT!
Power adapter information:
Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50-60Hz Rating output current: 2A (24W) Rating output voltage: 12V 24 Notebook PC E-Manual IMPORTANT!
Locate the input/output rating label on your Notebook PC and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some Notebook PC models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your Notebook PC is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your Notebook PC on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your Notebook PC. To disconnect your Notebook PC from its main power supply, unplug your Notebook PC from the power socket. WARNING!
Read the following precautions for your Notebook PCs battery:
Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device (for non-removable battery only). The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your Notebook PCs battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery
(for non-removable battery only). Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 25 Notebook PC E-Manual Lift to open the display panel Press the power button 26 Notebook PC E-Manual Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad Gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. Refer to the following illustrations when using hand gestures on your touch screen panel and touchpad. NOTE: The following screenshots are for reference only. The touch screen panels appearance may vary depending on model. Using touch screen panel gestures The gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. The functions can be activated by using the hand gestures on your Notebook PCs touch screen panel. Left edge swipe Right edge swipe Swipe from the left edge of the screen to launch Task view. Swipe from the right edge of the screen to launch Action Center. 27 Notebook PC E-Manual Tap/Double-tap Press and hold Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Press and hold to open the right-
click menu. Zoom in Zoom out Spread apart your two fingers on the touch screen panel. Bring together your two fingers on the touch screen panel. 28 Notebook PC E-Manual Finger slide Drag Slide your finger to scroll up and down and slide your finger to pan the screen left or right. Drag to create a selection box around multiple items. Drag and drop an item to move it to a new location. 29 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 30 Notebook PC E-Manual One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 31 Notebook PC E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-
click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Tap Tap two fingers on the touchpad to simulate the right-click function. 32 Notebook PC E-Manual Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. 33 Notebook PC E-Manual Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. Three-finger gestures Tap Tap three fingers on the touchpad to invoke Cortana. 34 Notebook PC E-Manual Swipe left/Swipe right If you opened multiple apps, swipe three fingers left or right to switch between these apps. Swipe up Swipe down Swipe up to see an overview of all the apps currently opened. Swipe down to show the desktop. 35 Notebook PC E-Manual Four-finger gestures Tap Tap four fingers on the touchpad to invoke Action Center. Customizing your touchpad Launch All settings from the Action Center. Select Devices, then select Mouse & touchpad. Adjust the settings to your preference. 1. 2. 3. 36 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard can trigger the following commands:
Puts the Notebook PC into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your Notebook PC. 37 Notebook PC E-Manual Enables or disables the touchpad Turns the speaker on or off Turns the speaker volume down Turns the speaker volume up Toggles between insert mode and overtype mode Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard used as below:
Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 38 Notebook PC E-Manual Rotating the display panel Your Notebook PCs display panel is adjustable up to 360 degrees. You may adjust the display panel as shown below. 360 degrees adjustable Notebook PC mode 39 Notebook PC E-Manual Stand mode Tent mode Tablet mode NOTE: Rotating the screen to Stand, Tent and Tablet mode will disable the keyboard and touchpad. 40 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3:
Working with Windows 10 41 Notebook PC E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your Notebook PC for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your Notebook PC for the first time:
1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your Notebook PC. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your Notebook PC. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:
Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your Notebook PC is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: All provided screenshots and instructions in this chapter are from Windows 10 for reference. These may vary depending on your operating system. 42 Notebook PC E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your Notebook PCs programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your Notebook PC to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:
Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust Notebook PC settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your Notebook PC Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 43 Notebook PC E-Manual Launching the Start menu Tap the Start button your desktop. in the lower-left corner of Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your Notebook PC. Tap the program to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your Notebook PC in alphabetical order. 44 Notebook PC E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 45 Notebook PC E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your Notebook PCs touch screen, touchpad, or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Tap the app to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:
Moving apps Press and hold the app, then drag and drop it to a new location. Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 46 Notebook PC E-Manual Resizing apps Press and hold the app, then tap tile size. and select an app Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. or Press select Resize and select an app tile size.
(on selected models), then Unpinning apps Press and hold the app, then tap the icon. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. or Press select Unpin from Start.
(on selected models), then 47 Notebook PC E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Press and hold the app, then tap Pin to taskbar. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. or Press select Pin to taskbar.
(on selected models), then Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, press and hold the app you want to add to the Start menu, then tap Pin to Start. From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press or
(on selected models) on the app that you want to add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. 48 Notebook PC E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Tap the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe form the left Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 49 Notebook PC E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 50 Notebook PC E-Manual Using Snap or 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 51 Notebook PC E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Click the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe from the right Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 52 Notebook PC E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.
\
Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel*
Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 53 Notebook PC E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings*
* On selected models 54 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your Notebook PCs Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your Notebook PC. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your Notebook PC to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:
or 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 55 Notebook PC E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-
enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your Notebook PC. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your Notebook PC with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:
1. 2. 3. or Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your Notebook PC with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your Notebook PC with the device. NOTE: For some Bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your Notebook PC. 56 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your Notebook PC safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press
. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press
. 57 Notebook PC E-Manual Turning your Notebook PC off You can turn off your Notebook PC by doing either of the following procedures:
or Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.
>
From the log-in screen, select
> Shut down. to launch Shut down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your Notebook PC is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC turns off. 58 Notebook PC E-Manual Putting your Notebook PC to sleep To put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode:
or Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your Notebook PC to sleep.
>
From the log-in screen, select
> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 59 Notebook PC E-Manual 60 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 4:
Power-On Self-Test (POST) 61 Notebook PC E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The POST (Power-On Self-Test) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your Notebook PC. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the Notebook PCs architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the function keys of your Notebook PC. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the Notebook PC. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your Notebook PC. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:
An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. Accessing BIOS Enter the BIOS settings by using any of the following methods:
62 Notebook PC E-Manual Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. Launch the Start menu, and choose Settings > Update &
security > Recovery, then select Restart now under Advanced startup. When you enter the Advanced startup screen, select Troubleshoot > Advanced options > UEFI Firmware Settings >
Restart. BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. EZ Mode This menu appears when you enter the BIOS setup program and provides you an overview of the basic system information. To access the Advanced Mode for the advanced BIOS settings, select Advanced Mode (F7) or press
. 63 Notebook PC E-Manual Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. 1. 2. 64 Notebook PC E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your Notebook PC. It also allows you to control the access to your Notebook PCs hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:
If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering the operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. 65 Notebook PC E-Manual To set the password:
1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Setup Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press
. Re-type to confirm the password then select OK. To clear the password:
On the Security screen, select Setup Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press
. Leave other fields blank then select OK to continue. Select OK to clear the old password. NOTE: A keyboard is required to type in the password. 1. 2. 3. 4. 66 Notebook PC E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. 67 Notebook PC E-Manual To update the BIOS:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the Notebook PCs exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your Notebook PC. Restart your Notebook PC then access the BIOS settings. From the BIOS menu, select Advanced > ASUS EZ Flash 3 Utility, then press
. 68 Notebook PC E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press update. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the 7. After the BIOS update process, select Save & Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 69 Notebook PC E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your Notebook PC allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!
Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your Notebook PC. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your Notebook PC is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:
Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your Notebook PC without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your Notebook PC to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your Notebook PC to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 70 Notebook PC E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your Notebook PC such as:
-
-
Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your Notebook PC. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your Notebook PC. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 71 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 72 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs 73 Notebook PC E-Manual Useful tips for your Notebook PC To help you maximize the use of your Notebook PC, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:
Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your Notebook PC. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the Notebook PC at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your Notebook PC for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your Notebook PC:
-
-
-
-
Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 74 Notebook PC E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the Notebook PC. What should I do?
Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?
The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your Notebook PC. The brightness and color tone of your Notebook PC may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my Notebook PCs battery life?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 75 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My battery charge indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?
Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?
Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my Notebook PCs audio speakers?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your Notebook PC and remove it. 7. What should I do if my Notebook PCs power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?
Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 76 Notebook PC E-Manual 8. My Notebook PC cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?
Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing
. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?
Press the key or
(on selected models) on your Notebook PC to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 77 Notebook PC E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my Notebook PC, the power indicator lights up but nothing appears on my screen. What can I do to fix this?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Force shutdown your Notebook PC by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter and battery pack are inserted correctly then turn on your Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:
Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Remove all connected USB devices then restart your Notebook PC. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your Notebook PC might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My Notebook PC boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?
Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 78 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My Notebook PC does not boot up. How can I fix this?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Remove all connected devices to your Notebook PC then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my Notebook PC wake up from sleep mode?
You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your Notebook PC and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 79 Notebook PC E-Manual 80 Notebook PC E-Manual Appendices 81 Notebook PC E-Manual DVD-ROM Drive Information The DVD-ROM drive allows you to view and create your own CDs and DVDs. You can purchase an optional DVD viewer software to view DVD titles. NOTE: The DVD-ROM Drive is available on selected models. Regional Playback Information Playback of DVD movie titles involves decoding MPEG2 video, digital AC3 audio and decryption of CSS protected content. CSS (sometimes called copy guard) is the name given to the content protection scheme adopted by the motion picture industry to satisfy a need to protect against unlawful content duplication. Although the design rules imposed on CSS licensors are many, one rule that is most relevant is playback restrictions on regionalized content. In order to facilitate geographically staggered movie releases, DVD video titles are released for specific geographic regions as defined in Region Definitions below. Copyright laws require that all DVD movies be limited to a particular region (usually coded to the region at which it is sold). While DVD movie content may be released for multiple regions, CSS design rules require that any system capable of playing CSS encrypted content must only be capable of playing one region. IMPORTANT! The region setting may be changed up to five times using the viewer software, then it can only play DVD movies for the last region setting. Changing the region code after that will require factory resetting which is not covered by warranty. If resetting is desired, shipping and resetting costs will be at the expense of the user. 82 Notebook PC E-Manual Region Definitions Region 1 Canada, US, US Territories Region 2 Czech, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Gulf States, Hungary, Iceland, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Saudi Arabia, Scotland, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Turkey, UK, Greece, Former Yugoslav Republics, Slovakia Region 3 Burma, Indonesia, South Korea, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, Taiwan, Thailand, Vietnam Region 4 Australia, Caribbean (Except US Territories), Central America, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, South America Region 5 CIS, India, Pakistan, Rest of Africa, Russia, North Korea Region 6 China 83 Notebook PC E-Manual Blu-ray ROM Drive Information The Blu-ray ROM Drive allows you to view HD (High-Definition) videos and other disc file formats such as DVDs and CDs. NOTE: The Blue-ray ROM Drive is available on selected models. Region Definitions Region A North, Central and South American countries, and their territories; Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, Japan, Korea (South and North), South East Asian countries and their territories. Region B European, African, and South West Asian countries and their territories; Australia and New Zealand. Region C Central, South Asian, Eastern European countries and their territories; China and Mongolia. NOTE: Refer to Blu-ray Disc website at www.blu-raydisc.com/en/Technical/FAQs/Blu-rayDiscforVideo.aspx for more details. Internal Modem Compliancy The Notebook PC with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC
(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. 84 Notebook PC E-Manual Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:
This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-
working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. 85 Notebook PC E-Manual This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 86 Notebook PC E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21.html. 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling
(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 87 Notebook PC E-Manual Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.
(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) This device operates within a 5.15-5.25 GHz frequency range and is restricted for indoor use only. Outdoor operation within 5150-5250 MHz is prohibited. FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 13 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. 88 Notebook PC E-Manual RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. Compliance Statement of Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED) This device complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 89 Notebook PC E-Manual Dclaration de conformit de Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada
(ISED) Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dInnovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement. La bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserve uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 90 Notebook PC E-Manual Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada
(IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits when operated in portable exposure conditions. Informations concernant l'exposition aux frquences radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par cet appareil sans fil est infrieure la limite d'exposition aux frquences radio d'Industrie Canada (IC). Utilisez l'appareil sans fil de faon minimiser les contacts humains lors d'un fonctionnement normal. Cet appareil a t valu et dmontr conforme aux limites de DAS (Dbit d'absorption spcifique) d'IC lorsqu'il est utilis dans des conditions d'exposition des appareils portables. Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America 2.412-2.472 GHz Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through CH13 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 91 Notebook PC E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the Notebook PC modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
DO NOT use the Notebook PC near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the Notebook PC in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (non-rechargeable) and secondary
(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the Notebook PC battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 92 Notebook PC E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded
(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. 93 Notebook PC E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Danger dexplosion si la batterie nest pas correctement remplace. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie de type semblable ou quivalent, recommande par le fabricant. Jeter les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)
(Japanese)
!
. (Russian) 94 Notebook PC E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 95 Notebook PC E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 96 Notebook PC E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:
Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS 97 Notebook PC E-Manual ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837
(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for California WARNING Cancer and Reproductive Harm -
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 98 Notebook PC E-Manual Regional notice for Singapore Complies with IMDA Standards DB103778 This ASUS product complies with IMDA Standards. Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls
(PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01% by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule II of the Rule. Notices for removable batteries Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The battery and its component must be recycled or disposed of properly. Avis concernant les batteries remplaables La batterie de lappareil peut prsenter un risque dincendie ou de brlure si celle-ci est retire ou dsassemble. La batterie et ses composants doivent tre recycls de faon approprie. National Telecommunications Commission of the Philippines This ASUS product complies with NTC Standards. No. ESD-xxx 99 Notebook PC E-Manual Simplified EU Declaration of Conformity ASUSTek Computer Inc. hereby declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Full text of EU declaration of conformity is available at https://www.asus.com/support/. The WiFi operating in the band 5150-5350MHz shall be restricted to indoor use for countries listed in the table below:
AT DE LV NO FI BE IS LI PL SE BG IE LT PT CH CZ IT LU RO UK DK EL HU SI HR EE ES MT SK FR CY NL TR RED RF Output table Function WiFi Bluetooth Frequency 2412 - 2472 MHz 5150 - 5350 MHz 5470 - 5725 MHz 2402 - 2480 MHz Maximum Output Power (EIRP) 19 dBm 18 dBm 19 dBm 7 dBm 100 Notebook PC E-Manual
various | 14.Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.75 MiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release |
various | 16.Module Lable | Internal Photos | 73.44 KiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release |
various | 17.Module photo | Internal Photos | 204.99 KiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release |
various | 15.External Photos | External Photos | 1.05 MiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release |
various | 6.Label and Label Location | ID Label/Location Info | 337.24 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
various | 6.Label and label location Rev0513 | ID Label/Location Info | 311.69 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
<ES8.0>
SATELLITE PRO C40-H P/N : PYS3XX-XXXXXX S/N : 12345678H 2.1A DC 19V Contains radio device : QCNFA425 Contains FCC ID : PPD-QCNFA425 Contains Lithium Ion Battery. MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED PROPERLY. MADE IN CHINA DBA
various | Label Location | ID Label/Location Info | 547.67 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
<ES8.0>
SATELLITE PRO C40-H P/N : PYS3XX-XXXXXX S/N : 12345678H 2.1A DC 19V Contains radio device : XXXXXXXXXXXX Contains FCC ID : XXXXXXXXXXXX Contains Lithium Ion Battery. MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED PROPERLY. MADE IN CHINA DBA
<ES8.0>
SATELLITE PRO C40-H PART NO./NO. DE PICE : PYS3XX-XXXXXX SERIAL NO./NO. DE SRIE : 12345678H DC 19V Contains radio device/Contient appareil radio : XXXXXXXXXXXX Contains/Contient IC : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 2.1A CAN ICES-3(B) / NMB-3(B) DBC
various | 10.SAR ReportAppendix B. SAR Plots of SAR Measurement | RF Exposure Info | 191.42 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
various | 10.SAR Report Appendix A. SAR Plots of System Verification | RF Exposure Info | 200.31 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
various | 10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-1 | RF Exposure Info | 4.60 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
various | 10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2 | RF Exposure Info | 4.91 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
various | 10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-3 | RF Exposure Info | 4.55 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
various | 10.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-4 | RF Exposure Info | 4.85 MiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
various | 10.SAR Report Appendix D. Photographs of the Test Set-Up | Test Setup Photos | 27.69 KiB | July 28 2021 / January 29 2022 | delayed release |
various | 2.Cover Letter FCC Permissive Change Letter Rev0723 | Cover Letter(s) | 149.01 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
7/22/2021
To whom it may concern,
With this letter, we apply for a FCC C2PC and an ISED C4PC for the QCNFA425 module.
FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA425 (Original Grant date: 9/14/2015)
ISED Certification Number: 4104A-QCNFA425 (Original approval date: 9/2/2015)
Below are the main aspects of this application:
• This application is to allow use of the above module in a portable host. The modular approval only
covers mobile hosts and therefore requires a C2PC for FCC and a C4PC for ISED Canada to allow use
of the module in the portable host(s) covered in this application. Host brand and model name(s) are
described in the test report(s) submitted with this application.
• The antenna used in this host computer is of the same type and with equal or lower gain to previously
approved antennas. For this reason, no RF reports are being provided to address spurious emission as
these are addressed by the original filing of the module.
• The module integrated host system(s) has been checked in accordance wth the KDB996369D04 for
radiated spurious emissions to be compliant.
• The power reduction is required to this host to comply SAR requirement. A new tuning power table
reflecting the power reduction is being submitted with this application.
• Software security remains unchanged from the original filing
Please kindly review and grant approval to this application.
Sincerely Yours,
__________________________
Caroline Yu
Qualcomm Technology, Inc.
various | 3.Declaration of authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 129.89 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
Qualcomm Technologies,
5775 Morehouse Drive, San Diego, CA 92121-1714
Inc.
www.qualcomm.com
7/2/2021
Federal Communications Commission
Authorization and Evaluation Division
7435 Oakland Mills Road
Columbia, MD 21046
To whom it may concern:
I, the undersigned, hereby authorize
Name of Agent: Melody Wu
Company name: BTL Inc.
to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization of QCNFA425 (FCC ID:
PPD-QCNFA425) with regards to the Class II Permissive Change of using QCNFA425 (FCC ID: PPD-
QCNFA425) module in the below portable host:
Host System Brand: Dynabook Technology (Hangzhou) Inc.
Host System Model Name: dynabook E10-S, SATELLITE PRO E10-S, dynabook E10W-S,
SATELLITE PRO E10W-S
In receiving and exchanging data for the purposes of obtaining Type Approval certificates for model QCNFA425
(FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA425)
This authorization includes and is limited to preparing and submitting applications and corresponding
documentation and information for certification of model QCNFA425 (FCC ID: PPD- QCNFA425) and expires
1 year past the date indicated at the top of this letter. This authorization supersedes all previous
authorizations provided by the undersigned.
I, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC
benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a).
In authorizing the above-mentioned agent as our representative, we recognize that we are still responsible to:
a)
comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;
b) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining
documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the
purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and
resolution of complaints;
c) make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been
granted;
d)
do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into
disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification
Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains
any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;
use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified
standards;
endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;
ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents,
brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;
keep a record of all complaints made known to us relating to the product’s compliance with
requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division
when requested;
take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or
services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;
k)
document the actions taken.
This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant.
Best Regards
Caroline Yu
Qualcomm Technologies Inc.
various | 4.Request for non-disclosure | Cover Letter(s) | 101.97 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commission’s rules (47 CFR §§ 0.457, 0.459),
we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public
Above mentioned documents contain detailed system and equipment description are considered as
proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be
harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market.
In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission’s
policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR §2.803 and the importation rules in 47
CFR §2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual
marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality
request on the following attachments for 180 days.
It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during
certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and that information will be
available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued.
7/2/2021
Federal Communications Commission
7435 Oakland Mills Road
Columbia MD 21046
Subject:
Request for Confidentiality
FCC ID:
PPD-QCNFA425
To Whom It May Concern:
disclosure indefinitely.
•
•
Tune-up Procedure
Antenna Specification
•
•
•
•
Test Setup Photos
Internal Photos
External Photos
User Manual
Sincerely,
_________________________
Caroline Yu
Qualcomm Technology, Inc.
various | Cover Letter(s) | 18.54 KiB | July 28 2021 / August 02 2021 |
www.qualcomm.com J QUALCOMM Incorporated 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121-1714 September 16, 2013 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Authorization of Handling FCC Regulatory Applications FCC Identifier PPD To Whom It May Concern:
I, hereby, authorize Caroline Yu, to handle FCC Regulatory related applications for QUALCOMM ATHEROS Incorporated FCC Identifier PPD and can sign all required application documents. Best Regards, Paul Guckian VP, Engineering Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121 Office: 858-651-1547 pguckian@qualcomm.com
various | 11.Test Report BLE APLRSE only Rev0513 | Test Report | 817.29 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 11.Test Report WLAN APL RSE only Rev0513 | Test Report | 1.41 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 12.Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 403.57 KiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix A. SAR Plots of System Verification | RF Exposure Info | 211.78 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix B. SAR Plots of SAR Measurement | RF Exposure Info | 200.41 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-1-1 | RF Exposure Info | 4.77 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-1-2 | RF Exposure Info | 4.76 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2-1 | RF Exposure Info | 4.65 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2-2 | RF Exposure Info | 5.00 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix C. Calibration Certificate-2-3 | RF Exposure Info | 552.89 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 13.SAR Report Appendix D. Photographs of the Test Set-Up | Test Setup Photos | 23.79 KiB | May 27 2021 / November 28 2021 | delayed release |
various | 2.Cover Letter ermissive Change Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 148.68 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
4/19/2021 To whom it may concern, With this letter, we apply for a FCC C2PC and an ISED C4PC for the QCNFA425 module. FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA425 (Original Grant date: 9/14/2015) ISED Certification Number: 4104A-QCNFA425 (Original approval date: 9/2/2015) Below are the main aspects of this application:
This application is to allow use of the above module in a portable host. The modular approval only covers mobile hosts and therefore requires a C2PC for FCC and a C4PC for ISED Canada to allow use of the module in the portable host(s) covered in this application. Host brand and model name(s) are described in the test report(s) submitted with this application. The antenna used in this host computer is of the same type and with equal or lower gain to previously approved antennas. For this reason, no RF reports are being provided to address spurious emission as these are addressed by the original filing of the module. The module integrated host system(s) has been spot checked in accordance wth the KDB996369D04 for radiated spurious emissions to be compliant. The power reduction is required to this host to comply SAR requirement. A new tuning power table reflecting the power reduction is being submitted with this application. Software security remains unchanged from the original filing Please kindly review and grant approval to this application. Sincerely Yours, __________________________ Caroline Yu Qualcomm Technology, Inc.
various | 11.Test Report RLAN APLRSEPower[FCC] Rev0527 | Test Report | 2.16 MiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
various | 11.Test Report BT APLRSE only Rev0513 | Test Report | 923.67 KiB | May 27 2021 / June 01 2021 |
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2021-08-02 | 2422 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
3 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
4 | 2021-06-01 | 2422 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
5 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
6 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
7 | 2018-07-05 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
8 | 2422 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
9 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
10 | 2018-04-30 | 2422 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
11 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
12 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
13 | 2017-12-04 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
14 | 2422 ~ 2452 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
15 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
16 | 2017-09-21 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
17 | 2017-09-20 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |
18 | 2422 ~ 2452 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
19 | 2016-07-07 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
20 | 2422 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
21 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
22 | 2015-09-02 | 2422 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
23 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
24 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||
25 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various | Effective |
2021-08-02
|
||||
various |
2021-06-01
|
|||||
various |
2018-07-05
|
|||||
various |
2018-04-30
|
|||||
various |
2017-12-04
|
|||||
various |
2017-09-21
|
|||||
various |
2017-09-20
|
|||||
various |
2016-07-07
|
|||||
various |
2015-09-02
|
|||||
various | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.
|
||||
various | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003716743
|
||||
various | Physical Address |
1700 Technology Dr
|
||||
various |
San Jose, CA
|
|||||
various |
San Jose, California 95110
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
various | TCB Application Email Address |
L******@ul.com
|
||||
various | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
various |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
various | Grantee Code |
PPD
|
||||
various | Equipment Product Code |
QCNFA425
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
various | Name |
P**** G****
|
||||
various | Title |
Vice President, Regulatory Engineering
|
||||
various | Telephone Number |
858-6********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
858-6********
|
||||
various |
p******@qti.qualcomm.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
BTL Inc.
|
||||
various |
DEKRA Testing and Certification Co., Ltd.
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various | Name |
G****** C******
|
||||
various |
V******** W********
|
|||||
various |
M****** T******
|
|||||
various | Physical Address |
No. 68-1, Ln. 169, Sec. 2, Datong Rd., Xizhi Dist.
|
||||
various |
No.5-22, Ruishukeng, Linkou Dist.
|
|||||
various |
No.19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Wen Hwa Vil.
|
|||||
various |
New Taipei City, 114
|
|||||
various |
New Taipei City
|
|||||
various |
New Taipei City, 24451
|
|||||
various |
Taoyuan City, 33383
|
|||||
various |
Taiwan
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
+886-********
|
||||
various |
+8862********
|
|||||
various |
886 2******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886 2********
|
|||||
various |
886 3******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886 3********
|
|||||
various | Fax Number |
886-2********
|
||||
various |
886 2********
|
|||||
various |
886 3********
|
|||||
various |
g******@newbtl.com
|
|||||
various |
v******@dekra.com,QCARG@qti.qualcomm.com
|
|||||
various |
M******@tw.bureauveritas.com,QCARG@qti.qualcom
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
DEKRA Testing and Certification Co., Ltd.
|
||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various | Name |
V**** W****
|
||||
various |
M**** T******
|
|||||
various | Physical Address |
No.5-22, Ruishukeng, Linkou Dist.
|
||||
various |
No.19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Wen Hwa Vil.
|
|||||
various |
New Taipei City, 24451
|
|||||
various |
Taoyuan City, 33383
|
|||||
various |
Taiwan
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
886 2******** Extension:
|
||||
various |
886 2********
|
|||||
various |
886 3******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886 3********
|
|||||
various | Fax Number |
886 2********
|
||||
various |
886 3********
|
|||||
various |
v******@dekra.com,QCARG@qti.qualcomm.com
|
|||||
various |
M******@tw.bureauveritas.com,QCARG@qti.qualcom
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
various | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 01/29/2022 | ||||
various | 11/28/2021 | |||||
various | 01/01/2019 | |||||
various | 10/27/2018 | |||||
various | 12/30/2017 | |||||
various | 02/25/2018 | |||||
various | 01/03/2017 | |||||
various | 02/28/2016 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
various | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
various | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
various | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
various | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
various | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
various | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Single Stream 802.11a/b/g/n/ac + BT 4.1 M.2 1216 Type Card | ||||
various | Single Strema 802.11a/b/g/n/ac + BT 4.1 M.2 1216 Type Card | |||||
various | Single Stream 802.11a/b/g/n/ac + BT 4.1 M.2 1216 TypeCard | |||||
various | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | Modular Equipment Type | Single Modular Approval | ||||
various | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
various | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | |||||
various | Original Equipment | |||||
various | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
various | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
various | Grant Comments | Class II permissive change filing to add new hosts (Dynabook E10-S, SATELLIET Pro E10-S, Dynabook E10W-S, SATELLITE PRO E10W-S) Portable Computers with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported body SAR value is 1.34 W/kg. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 1.34 W/kg. Output power is conducted. This device supports 802.11n/ac bandwidths of 20MHz and 40MHz in the 2.4GHz band and 20MHz, 40MHz, and 80MHz in the 5.8 GHz band. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | ||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new hosts (Dynabook E10-S, SATELLIET Pro E10-S, Dynabook E10W-S, SATELLITE PRO E10W-S) Portable Computers with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported SAR values for body is 1.40 W/kg. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions across all filings under this FCC ID are 1.40 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new hosts (Dynabook E10-S, SATELLIET Pro E10-S, Dynabook E10W-S, SATELLITE PRO E10W-S) Portable Computers with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions across all filings under this FCC ID are 0.31 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new host SATELLIET PRO (Model: C40-H, C50-H, C40-G, C50-G) Portable Computer with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported body SAR value is 1.09 W/kg. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 1.22 W/kg. Output power is conducted. This device supports 802.11n/ac bandwidths of 20MHz and 40MHz in the 2.4GHz band and 20MHz, 40MHz, and 80MHz in the 5.8 GHz band. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new host SATELLIET PRO (Model: C40-H, C50-H, C40-G, C50-G) Portable Computer with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported SAR values for body is 1.40 W/kg. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions across all filings under this FCC ID are 1.40 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new host SATELLIET PRO (Model: C40-H, C50-H, C40-G, C50-G) Portable Computer with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions across all filings under this FCC ID are 0.31 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new host Lenovo ideapad D330-10IGM Portable Computer with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions are <0.1 W/kg and 1.38 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions across all filings under this FCC ID are 0.31 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multitransmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new host Lenovo ideapad D330-10IGM Portable Computer with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported SAR value is 1.22 W/kg. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 1.22 W/kg. Output power is conducted. This device supports 802.11n/ac bandwidths of 20MHz and 40MHz in the 2.4GHz band and 20MHz, 40MHz, and 80MHz in the 5.8 GHz band. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multitransmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change filing to add new host Lenovo ideapad D330-10IGM Portable Computer with new antenna and reduced power as documented in this filing. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions are 1.28 W/kg and 1.38 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission conditions across all filings under this FCC ID are 1.28 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multitransmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Samsung NP550XTA) and antenna with power reduction and disable CH12-13 as described in this filing. The highest reported SAR value under this filing is <0.10 W/Kg. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID is 1.24 W/kg. Output power is conducted. This device supports 802.11n/ac bandwidths of 20MHz and 40MHz. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Samsung NP550XTA) and antenna with power reduction as described in this filing. The highest reported SAR value under this filing is <0.10 W/Kg. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID for standalone and simultaneous exposure conditions are 1.27 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Samsung NP550XTA) and antenna with power reduction as described in this filing. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID is 0.31 W/kg. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS Models TP202N/ R214N /J202N) with reduced power described in the filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID for standalone and simultaneous exposure conditions are 0.31 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS Models TP202N/ R214N /J202N) with reduced power described in the filing. Wi-Fi Channels 12/13 are disabled in this host configuration. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20 and 40 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR value in this application is 0.70 W/kg. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID for standalone and simultaneous exposure conditions are 1.24 W/kg and 1.34 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS Models TP202N/ R214N /J202N) with reduced power described in the filing. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR value in this application is 0.87 W/kg. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID for standalone and simultaneous exposure conditions are 1.27 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS Models T103H/R107H/H103H) with reduced power described in the filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID for standalone and simultaneous exposure conditions are 0.31 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS Models T103H/R107H/H103H) with reduced power described in the filing. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR value in this application is 0.64 W/kg. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID for standalone and simultaneous exposure conditions are 1.27 W/kg and 1.50 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS Models T103H/R107H/H103H) with reduced power described in the filing. Wi-Fi Channels 12/13 are disabled in this host configuration. Output power is conducted. This device supports 20 and 40 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR value in this application is 0.6 W/kg. The highest reported SAR values across all filings under this FCCID for standalone and simultaneous exposure conditions are 1.24 W/kg and 1.34 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS models T101H / H101H / R105H). Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous exposure conditions are <0.1 W/kg and 1.29 W/Kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS models T101H / H101H / R105H). Output power is conducted. This device supports 802.11n/ac bandwidths of 20MHz and 40MHz in the 2.4GHz band and 20MHz, 40MHz, and 80MHz in the 5.8 GHz band. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous exposure conditions are 1.08 W/Kg and 1.29 W/Kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change to add the module and allow portable configuration in the specific laptop/notebook host (ASUS models T101H / H101H / R105H). Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous exposure conditions are 0.39 W/kg and 0.61 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This device supports 802.11n/ac bandwidths of 20MHz and 40MHz in the 2.4GHz band and 20MHz, 40MHz, and 80MHz in the 5.8 GHz band. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0 cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR value for body exposure conditions with 1.2 cm separation is 0.15 W/kg. The highest reported SAR value for body exposure conditions with 0.5 cm separation is 0.39 W/Kg. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This device supports 20, 40 and 80 MHz bandwidths. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power settings according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous exposure conditions with 1.2 cm separation are 0.56 W/kg and 0.57 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous exposure conditions with 0.5 cm separation are 0.63 W/Kg and 0.65 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This transmitter has been approved for use in mobile RF exposure category configurations with the antenna(s) installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. This transmitter also has been approved by KDB 616217 SAR modular approval when operating at reduced power settings as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this device must be installed in the display section of laptop or notebook computers to provide a separation distance of at least 1.2 cm or 0.5 cm from all persons, with respective power settings and installation according to the integrator instructions. Installation in tablet configurations must provide a separation distance of at least 10 mm between antenna and user with power setting according to the integrator instructions for 0.5 cm separation. The separation distance between the main and auxiliary antennas shall be at least 3.0cm when positioned horizontally or vertically. Other configurations or lesser separation distances require additional evaluation and certification. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous exposure conditions with 1.2 cm separation are <0.1 W/kg and and 0.57 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous exposure conditions with 0.5 cm separation are <0.1 W/kg and and 0.65 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
various | Firm Name |
BTL Inc.
|
||||
various |
Shenzhen BALUN Technology Co., Ltd.
|
|||||
various |
KCTL INC
|
|||||
various |
DEKRA TESTING AND CERTIFICATION CO., LTD. LinKou
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS(H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various | Name |
A******** Y******
|
||||
various |
H****** Q****
|
|||||
various |
J******** B********
|
|||||
various |
S******** H****
|
|||||
various |
E****** L******
|
|||||
various |
K**** L******
|
|||||
various |
R**** C****
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
+886-******** Extension:
|
||||
various |
086-7********
|
|||||
various |
82-70********
|
|||||
various |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886-3******** Extension:
|
|||||
various | Fax Number |
+886-********
|
||||
various |
82-50********
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
886-3********
|
|||||
various |
a******@btl.com.tw
|
|||||
various |
q******@baluntek.com
|
|||||
various |
j******@kctl.co.kr
|
|||||
various |
s******@dekra.com
|
|||||
various |
e******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
various |
k******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
various |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2472 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2462 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 9 | 15E | 38 CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 11 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 12 | 15E | 38 CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2472 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2462 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 9 | 15E | 38 CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 11 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 12 | 15E | 38 CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2472 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2462 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 9 | 15E | 38 CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 11 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 12 | 15E | 38 CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2472 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2462 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 5 | 15E | CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 6 | 15E | CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 7 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 8 | 15E | CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 9 | 15E | CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 11 | 15E | CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 12 | 15E | CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
14 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2402 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
14 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
14 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2452 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 9 | 15E | 38 CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 11 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 12 | 15E | 38 CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
16 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
16 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 9 | 15E | 38 CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 11 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 12 | 15E | 38 CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
18 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
18 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
18 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2452 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
19 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
19 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
20 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
20 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2472 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
20 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2462 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 9 | 15E | 38 CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 11 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 12 | 15E | 38 CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
22 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
22 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2472 | 0.246 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
22 | 3 | 15C | CC | 2422 | 2462 | 0.189 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5190 | 5230 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5210 | 5210 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC | 5270 | 5310 | 0.046 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 6 | 15E | 38 CC | 5290 | 5290 | 0.017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 7 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5720 | 0.053 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 8 | 15E | 38 CC | 5510 | 5710 | 0.045 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 9 | 15E | 38 CC | 5530 | 5690 | 0.041 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 11 | 15E | 38 CC | 5755 | 5795 | 0.035 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 12 | 15E | 38 CC | 5775 | 5775 | 0.021 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
24 | 1 | 15B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
25 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.018 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
25 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.013 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC